PROSTATE CANCER-RELASED GENE 3 (PG-3) AND BIALLELIC MARKERS THEREOF

Abstract: The invention concerns the genomic sequence and cDNA sequences of the PG-3 gene. The invention also concerns biallelic markers of the PG-3 gene. The invention also concerns polypeptides encoded by the PG-3 gene. The invention also deals with antibodies directed specifically against such polypeptides that are useful as diagnostic reagents.

Description: PROSTATE CANCER-RELATED GENE 3 (PG3) AND BIALLELIC MARKERS THEREOF FIELD OF THE INVENTION The present invention is directed to polynucleotides encoding a PG-3 polypeptide as well as the regulatory regions located at the 5'- and 3'-ends of said coding region. The invention also relates to polypeptides encoded by the PG-3 gene. The invention also relates to antibodies directed specifically against such polypeptides that are useful as diagnostic reagents. The invention further encompasses biallelic markers of the PG-3 gene useful in genetic analysis. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Cancer is one of the leading causes of death in industrialized countries. This makes cancer a serious burden in terms of public health, especially in view of the aging of the population. Indeed, over the next 25 years there will be a dramatic increase in the number of people developing cancer. Globally, 10 million new cancer patients are diagnosed each year and there will be 20 million new cancer diagnoses by the year 2020. In spite of a large number of available therapeutic techniques including but not limited to surgery, chemotherapy, radiotherapy, bone marow transplantation, and in spite of encouraging .. . results obtained with experimental protocols in immunotherapy or gene therapy, the overall survival rate of cancer patients does not reach 50% after 5 years . Therefore, there is a strong need for both a reliable diagnostic procedure which would enable early-stage cancer prognosis, and for preventive and curative treatments ofthe disease. A cancer is a clonal proliferation of cells produced as a consequence of cumulative genetic damage that finally results in unrestrained cell growth, tissue invasion and metastasis (cell transformation). Regardless ofthe type of cancer, transformed cells carry damaged DNA as gross chromosomal translocations or, more subtly, as DNA amplification, rearrangement or even point mutations. Cancer is caused by the dysregulation ofthe expression of certain genes. The development of a tumor requires an important succession of steps. Each of these comprises the dysregulation of a gene either involved in cell cycle activity or in genomic stability and the emergence of an abnormal mutated clone which overwhelms the other normal cell types because of a proliferative advantage. Cancer indeed happens because of a combination of two mechanisms. Some mutations enhance cell proliferation, increasing the target population of cells for the next mutation. Other mutations affect the stability of the entire genome, increasing the overall mutation rate, as in the case of mismatch repair proteins (reviewed in Arnheim N & Shibata D, 1997). Recent studies have identified three groups of genes which are frequently mutated in cancer. The first two groups are involved in cell cycle activity , which is a mechanism that drives normal cell proliferation and ensures the normal development and homeostasis of the organism. Conversely, many of the properties of cancer cells - uncontrolled proliferation, increased mutation rate, abnormal translocations and gene amplifications - can be attributed directly to perturbations of the normal regulation or progression ofthe cycle. The first group of genes, called oncogenes, are genes whose products activate cell proliferation. The normal non-mutant versions are called protooncogenes. The mutated forms are excessively or inappropriately active in promoting cell proliferation and act in the cell in a dominant way such that a single mutant allele is enough to affect the cell phenotype. Activated oncogenes are rarely transmitted as germline mutations since they are probably be lethal when expressed in all the cells in the organism. Therefore oncogenes can only be investigated in tumor tissues. Oncogenes and protooncogenes can be classified into several different categories according to their function. This classification includes genes that code for proteins involved in signal transduction such as: growth factors (i.e., sis, int-2); receptor and non-receptor protein-tyrosine kinases (i.e., erbB, src, bcr-abl, met, trk); membrane-associated G proteins (i.e., ras); cytoplasmic protein kinases (i.e., mitogen-activated protein kinase -MAPK- family, raf, mos, pak), or nuclear transcription factors (i.e., myc, myb, fas, jun, rel) (for review see Hunter T, 1991 ; Fanger GR et al, 1997 ; Weiss FU et al, 1997). The second group of genes which are frequently mutated in cancer, called tumor suppressor genes, are genes whose products inhibit cell growth. Mutant versions in cancer cells have lost their normal function, and act in the cell in a recessive way such that both copies of the gene must be inactivated in order to change the cell phenotype. Most importantly, the tumor phenotype can be rescued by the wild type allele, as shown by cell fusion experiments first described by Harris and colleagues (Harris H et α/.,1969). Germline mutations of tumor suppressor genes are transmitted and thus studied in both constitutional and tumor DNA from familial or sporadic cases. The current family of tumor suppressors includes DNA-binding transcription factors (i.e.,p53, WT1), transcription regulators (i.e., RB, APC, and BRCA1), and protein kinase inhibitors (i.e., pi 6), among others (for review, see Haber D & Harlow E, 1997). The third group of genes which are frequently mutated in cancer, called mutator genes, are responsible for maintaining genome integrity and/or low mutation rates. Loss of function of both alleles increases cell mutation rates, and as a consequence, proto-oncogenes and tumor suppressor genes are mutated. Mutator genes can also be classified as tumor suppressor genes, except for the fact that tumorigenesis caused by this class of genes cannot be suppressed simply by restoration of a wild-type allele, as described above. Genes whose inactivation may lead to a mutator phenotype include mismatch repair genes (i.e., MLH1, MSH2), DNA helicases (i.e., BLM, WRN) or other genes involved in DNA repair and genomic stability (i.e.,p53, possibly BRCA1 and BRCA2) (For review see Haber D & Harlow E, 1997; Fishel & Wilson. 1997 ; Ellis, 1997). The recent development of sophisticated techniques for genetic mapping has resulted in an ever expanding list of genes associated with particular types of human cancers. The human haploid genome contains an estimated 80,000 to 100,000 genes scattered on a 3 x 10 9 base-long double- stranded DNA. Each human being is diploid, e , possesses two haploid genomes, one from paternal origin, the other from maternal origin. The sequence of a given genetic locus may vary between individuals in a population or between the two copies of the locus on the chromosomes of a single individual. Genetic mapping techniques often exploit these differences, which are called polymorphisms, to map the location of genes associated with human phenotypes. One mapping technique, called the loss of heterozygosity (LOH) technique, is often employed to detect genes in which a loss of function results in a cancer, such as the tumor suppressor genes described above. Tumor suppressor genes often produce cancer via a two hit mechanism m which a first mutation, such as a point mutation (or a small deletion or insertion) inactivates one allele ofthe tumor suppressor gene. Often, this first mutation is inherited from generation to generation. A second mutation, often a spontaneous somatic mutation such as a deletion which deletes all or part ofthe chromosome carrying the other copy ofthe tumor suppressor gene, results in a cell in which both copies ofthe tumor suppressor gene are inactive. As a consequence ofthe deletion in the tumor suppressor gene, one allele is lost for any genetic marker located close to the tumor suppressor gene. Thus, if the patient is heterozygous for a marker, the tumor tissue loses heterozygosity, becoming homozygous or hemizygous. This loss of heterozygosity generally provides strong evidence for the existence of a tumor suppressor gene m the lost region. LOH has allowed the identification of several chromosomic regions associated with cancer. Indeed, substantial amounts of LOH data support the hypothesis that genes associated with distinct cancer types are located within 8p23 region ofthe human genome. Several regions of chromosome arm 8p were found to be frequently deleted in a vanety of human mahgnacies including those of the prostate, head and neck, lung and colon. Emi et al. demonstrated the involvement of the 8p23.1- 8p21.3 region in cases of hepatocellular carcinoma, colorectal cancer, and non-small cell lung cancer (Emi et al, 1992). Yaremko, et al , (1994) showed the existence of two major regions of LOH for chromosome 8 markers in a sample of 87 colorectal carcinomas. The most prominent loss was found for 8p23.1-pter, where 45% of informative cases demonstrated loss of alleles. Scholmck et al. (Scholmck et al, 1996 and Sunwoo et al , 1996) demonstrated the existence of three distinct regions of LOH for the markers of chromosome 8 in cases of squamous cell carcinoma ofthe supraglottic larynx. They showed that the allelic loss of 8p23 marker D8S264 serves as a statistically significant, independent predictor of poor prognosis for patients with supraglottic squamous cell carcinoma. The study of 51 squamous cell carcinomas ofthe head and neck and 29 oral squamous cell carcinoma cell lines showed a frequent allelic loss and homozygous deletion at 1 or more loci located in the 8p23 region (Ishwad CS et al, 1999). In addition, a high resolution deletion map of 150 squamous cell carninomas of the larynx and oral cavity showed two distinct classes of deletion for the 8p23 region withm the D8S264 to D8S1788 interval (Sunwoo et al , 1999). In other studies, Nagai et al. (1997) demonstrated the highest loss of heterozygosity in the specific region of 8p23 by genome wide scanning of LOH in 120 cases of hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC). Further studies using high-density polymorphic marker analysis identified three minimal deleted areas on chromosome 8p, one of them being a 5 cM area in 8p23, probably indicative ofthe presence of a tumor suppressor loci for HCC (Pineau P, et al, 1999). Gronwald et al. (1997) also demonstrated 8p23-pter loss in renal clear cell carcinomas. The same region is involved in specific cases of prostate cancer. Matsuyama et al. (1994) showed the specific deletion ofthe 8p23 band in prostate cancer cases, as monitored by FISH with D8S7 probe. They were able to document a substantial number of cases with deletions of 8p23 but retention ofthe 8p22 marker LPL. Moreover, Ichikawa et al. (1996) deduced the existence of a prostate cancer metastasis suppressor gene and localized it to 8p23-ql2 by studies of metastasis suppression in highly metastatic rat prostate cells after transfer of human chromosomes. Recently Washbum et al. (1997) were able to find substantial numbers of tumors with the allelic loss specific to 8p23 by LOH studies of 31 cases of human prostate cancer. In these samples they were able to define the minimal overlapping region with deletions covering genetic interval D8S262-D8S277. In addition, using PCR analysis of polymorphic microsatellite repeat markers, 29% of 60 prostate tumors showed LOH, at the locus D8S262 of the 8p23 region (Perinchery et al, 1999). Recent studies have also implicated the 8p23 region in other types of cancers such as fibrous histiocytomas, ovarian adenocarcinomas and gastric cancers. Indeed, comparative genomic hybridization data showed the involvment of the 8p23.1 region in fibrous histiocytomas and detected a minimal amplified region between D8S1819 and D8S550 containing a gene MASL1, the overexpression of which might be oncogenic (Sakabe et al, 1999). LOH was also observed for 27 ovarian adenocarcinomas on 8p. Detailed examination of nine tumours with partial deletions defined three regions of overlap including two in 8p23 (Wright et al, 1998). Comparative genomic hybridization of 58 primary gastric cancers detected gain of the 8p22-23 region in 24% ofthe tumors and even high-level amplification of the same region in 5% of the tumors . This amplified region was narrowed down to 8p23.1 by reverse-painting FISH to prophase chromosomes (Sakakura et α/., 1999). The present invention relates to the Prostate Cancer Related Gene 3 or PG-3 gene, a gene present in the 8p23 cancer candidate region, as well as diagnostic methods and reagents for detecting alleles of the PG-3 gene which may cause cancer, and therapies for treating cancer. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules comprising the genomic sequence and the cDNA sequence of a novel human gene which encodes a PG-3 protein. The PG-3 gene is localized in the 8p23 candidate region shown to be involved in several types of cancer by LOH studies and presents homology with the BRCA1 gene involved in transcriptional control through modulation of chromatin structure (Bochar et al, 2000), and in which mutations are thougth to be responsible for 45% of inherited breast cancer and more than 80% of inherited breast and ovarian cancer. In addition, BRCA1 carriers have a 4-fold increased risk of colon cancer, whereas male carriers face a 3-fold increased risk of prostate cancer. The PG-3 genomic sequence comprises regulatory sequences located upstream (5 '-end) and downstream (3'-end) ofthe transcribed portion of said gene, these regulatory sequences being also part ofthe invention. The invention also relates to the cDNA sequence encoding the PG-3 protein, as well as to the corresponding translation product. Oligonucleotide probes or primers hybridizing specifically with a PG-3 genomic or cDNA sequence are also part ofthe present invention, as well as DNA amplification and detection methods using said primers and probes. A further object ofthe invention relates to recombinant vectors comprising any of the nucleic acid sequences described herein, and in particular to recombinant vectors comprising a PG- 3 regulatory sequence or a sequence encoding a PG-3 protein. The present invention also relates to host cells and transgenic non-human animals comprising said nucleic acid sequences or recombinant vectors. The invention further encompasses biallelic markers ofthe PG-3 gene useful in genetic analysis. Finally, the invention is directed to methods for the screening of substances or molecules that inhibit the expression of PG-3, as well as to methods for the screening of substances or molecules that interact with a PG-3 polypeptide or that modulate the activity of a PG-3 polypeptide. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Figure 1 is a block diagram of an exemplary computer system. Figure 2 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of a process 200 for comparing a new nucleotide or protein sequence with a database of sequences in order to determine the homology levels between the new sequence and the sequences in the database. Figure 3 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of a process 250 in a computer for determining whether two sequences are homologous. Figure 4 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of an identifier process 300 for detecting the presence of a feature in a sequence. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE SEQUENCES PROVIDED IN THE SEQUENCE LISTING SEQ ID No 1 is a genomic sequence of PG-3 comprising the 5' regulatory region (upstream untranscribed region), the exons and introns, and the 3' regulatory region (downstream untranscribed region). SEQ ID No 2 is a cDNA sequence of PG-3. SEQ ID No 3 is the amino acid sequence encoded by the cDNA of SEQ ID No 2. SEQ ID No 4 is a pnmer containing the additional PU 5' sequence further descnbed in Example 2. SEQ ID No 5 is a pnmer containing the additional RP 5' sequence further descnbed in Example 2. In accordance with the regulations relating to Sequence Listings, the following codes have been used in the Sequence Listing to indicate the locations of biallelic markers within the sequences and to identify each ofthe alleles present at the polymorphic base. The code "r" in the sequences indicates that one allele of the polymorphic base is a guanme, while the other allele is an adenme. The code "y" in the sequences indicates that one allele ofthe polymorphic base is a thymine, while the other allele is a cytosine. The code "m" in the sequences indicates that one allele ofthe polymorphic base is an adenine, while the other allele is a cytosine. The code "k" in the sequences indicates that one allele o the polymorphic base is a guanine, while the other allele is a thymine. The code "s" in the sequences indicates that one allele ofthe polymoφhic base is a guanine, while the other allele is a cytosine. The code "w" in the sequences indicates that one allele ofthe polymoφhic base is an adenine, while the other allele is a thymine. The nucleotide code ofthe original allele for each biallelic marker is the following: Biallelic marker Oπsinal allele 5-390-177 c 5-391-43 G 5-392-222 T 5-392-280 T 4-59-27 G 4-58-289 c 4-54-199 A 4-54-180 C 4-51-312 G 99-86-266 A 4-88-107 G 5-397-141 G 5-398-203 C 99-12738-248 A 99-109-358 C 99-12749-175 T 4-21-154 C 4-21-317 G 4-23-326 G 99-12753-34 A 5-364-252 G 99-12755-280 G 99-12755-329 C - 87 -212 A 9-12757-318 C 9-12758-102 G 9-12758-136 C -105-98 A -105-86 G -45-49 T -44-277 T -86-60 C -84-334 G 9-78-321 T 9-12767-36 G 9-12767-143 T 9-12767-189 T 9-12767-380 G -80-328 C -36-384 C -36-264 G -36-261 C -35-333 A -35-240 G -35-173 T -35-133 C 9-12771-59 T 9-12774-334 A 9-12776-358 G 9-12781-113 A -104-298 C -104-254 G -104-250 C -104-214 A 9-12818-289 T 9-24807-271 C 9-24807-84 G 9-12831-157 G 9-12831-241 C 9-12832-387 T 9-12836-30 G 9-12844-262 C -24-74 C -24-246 C -24-314 G 4-27-190 A 5-400-145 G 5-400-149 G 5-400-175 T 5-400-231 T 5-400-367 A 99-12852-110 T 99-12852-325 A 4-37-326 A 4-37-107 G 5-270-92 G 99-12860-47 G 99-12860-57 T 5-402-144 C In some instances, the polymoφhic bases ofthe biallelic markers alter the identity of an amino acid in the encoded polypeptide. This is indicated in the accompanying Sequence Listing by use of the feature VARIANT, placement of an Xaa at the position of the polymoφhic amino acid, and definition of Xaa as the two alternative amino acids. For example if one allele of a biallelic marker is the codon CAC, which encodes histidine, while the other allele ofthe biallelic marker is CAA, which encodes glutamine, the Sequence Listing for the encoded polypeptide will contain an Xaa at the location ofthe polymoφhic amino acid. In this instance, Xaa would be defined as being histidine or glutamine. DETAILED DESCRIPTION The present invention concerns polynucleotides and polypeptides related to the PG-3 gene. Oligonucleotide probes and primers hybridizing specifically with a genomic or a cDNA sequence of PG-3 are also part ofthe invention. A further object ofthe invention relates to recombinant vectors comprising any ofthe nucleic acid sequences described in the present invention, and in particular recombinant vectors comprising a regulatory region of PG-3 or a sequence encoding the PG-3 protein, as well as host cells comprising said nucleic acid sequences or recombinant vectors. The invention also encompasses methods of screening for molecules which inhibit the expression ofthe PG-3 gene or which modulate the activity ofthe PG-3 protein. The invention also relates to antibodies directed specifically against such polypeptides that are useful as diagnostic reagents. The invention also concerns PG-3-related biallelic markers which can be used in any method of genetic analysis including linkage studies in families, linkage disequilibrium studies in populations and association studies of case-control populations. An important aspect of the present invention is that biallelic markers allow association studies to be performed to identify genes involved in complex traits. These biallelic markers may lead to allelic variants ofthe PG-3 protein. Definitions Before describing the invention in greater detail, the following definitions are set forth to illustrate and define the meaning and scope ofthe terms used to describe the invention herein. The terms "PG-3 gene", when used herein, encompasses genomic, mRNA and cDNA sequences encoding the PG-3 protein, including the untranscribed regulatory regions ofthe genomic DNA. The term "heterologous protein", when used herein, is intended to designate any protein or polypeptide other than the PG-3 protein. More particularly, the heterologous protein may be a compound which can be used as a marker in further experiments with a PG-3 regulatory region. The term "isolated" requires that the material be removed from its original environment (e. g., the natural environment if it is naturally occurring). For example, a naturally-occurring polynucleotide or polypeptide present in a living animal is not isolated, but the same polynucleotide or DNA or polypeptide, separated from some or all ofthe coexisting materials in the natural system, is isolated. Such a polynucleotide could be part of a vector and/or such a polynucleotide or polypeptide could be part of a composition, and still be isolated in that the vector or composition is not part of its natural environment. The term "purified" does not require absolute purity; rather, it is intended as a relative definition. Purification of starting material or natural material to at least one order of magnitude, preferably two or three orders, and more preferably four or five orders of magnitude is expressly contemplated. As an example, purification from 0.1 % concentration to 10 % concentration is two orders of magnitude. To illustrate, individual cDNA clones isolated from a cDNA library have been conventionally purified to electrophoretic homogeneity. The sequences obtained from these clones could not be obtained directly either from the library or from total human DNA. The cDNA clones are not naturally occurring as such, but rather are obtained via manipulation of a partially purified naturally occurring substance (messenger RNA). The conversion of mRNA into a cDNA library involves the creation of a synthetic substance (cDNA) and pure individual cDNA clones can be isolated from the synthetic library by clonal selection. Thus, creating a cDNA library from messenger RNA and subsequently isolating individual clones from that library results in an approximately 10 4 - 10 6 fold purification ofthe native message. The term "purified" is further used herein to describe a polynucleotide or polynucleotide of the invention which has been separated from other compounds including, but not limited to other polynucleotides or polypeptides (such as the enzymes used in the synthesis ofthe polynucleotide), carbohydrates, lipids, etc.,. The term "purified" may be used to specify the separation of monomeric polypeptides of the invention from oligomeric forms such as homo- or hetero- dimers, trimers, etc. The term "purified" may also be used to specify the separation of covalently closed polynucleotides from linear polynucleotides. A polynucleotide is substantially pure when at least about 50%, preferably 60 to 75% of a sample exhibits a single polynucleotide sequence and conformation (linear versus covalently close). A substantially pure polypeptide or polynucleotide typically comprises about 50%, preferably 60 to 90% weight/weight of a polypeptide or polynucleotide sample, respectively, more usually about 95%, and preferably is over about 99% pure. Polypeptide and polynucleotide punty, or homogeneity, is indicated by a number of means well known in the art, such as agarose or polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis of a sample, followed 5 by visualizing a single band upon staining the gel. For certain puφoses higher resolution can be provided by using HPLC or other means well known in the art. As an alternative embodiment, purification ofthe polypeptides and polynucleotides ofthe present invention may be expressed as "at least" a percent purity relative to heterologous polypeptides and polynucleotides (DNA, RNA or both). As a preferred embodiment, the polypeptides and polynucleotides ofthe present invention are at least; 10 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, 96%, 96%, 98%, 99%, or 100% pure relative to heterologous polypeptides and polynucleotides, respectively. As a further preferred embodiment the polypeptides and polynucleotides have a punty ranging from any number, to the thousandth position, between 90% and 100% (e.g., a polypeptide or polynucleotide at least 99.995% pure) relative to either heterologous polypeptides or polynucleotides, respectively, or as a 15 weight/weight ratio relative to all compounds and molecules other than those existing in the earner. Each number representing a percent punty, to the thousandth position, may be claimed as individual species of purity. The term "polypeptide" refers to a polymer of amino acids without regard to the length of the polymer; thus, peptides, oligopeptides, and proteins are included withm the definition of 20 polypeptide. This term also does not specify or exclude post-expression modifications of polypeptides, for example, polypeptides which include the covalent attachment of glycosyl groups, acetyl groups, phosphate groups, hpid groups and the like are expressly encompassed by the term polypeptide. Also included withm the definition are polypeptides which contain one or more analogs of an ammo acid (including, for example, non-naturally occurring ammo acids, amino acids 25 which only occur naturally m an unrelated biological system, modified ammo acids from mammalian systems etc.), polypeptides with substituted linkages, as well as other modifications known in the art, both naturally occurnng and non-naturally occurring. The term "recombinant polypeptide" is used herein to refer to polypeptides that have been artificially designed and which comprise at least two polypeptide sequences that are not found as 30 contiguous polypeptide sequences in their initial natural environment, or to refer to polypeptides which have been expressed from a recombinant polynucleotide As used herein, the term "non-human animal" refers to any non-human vertebrate, birds and more usually mammals, preferably pπmates, farm animals such as swine, goats, sheep, donkeys, and horses, rabbits or rodents, more preferably rats or mice. As used herein, the term "animal" is 35 used to refer to any vertebrate, preferable a mammal. Both the terms "animal" and "mammal" expressly embrace human subjects unless preceded with the term "non-human". As used herein, the term "antibody" refers to a polypeptide or group of polypeptides which are comprised of at least one binding domain, where an antibody binding domain is formed from the folding of variable domains of an antibody molecule to form three-dimensional binding spaces with an internal surface shape and charge distribution complementary to the features of an antigenic determinant of an antigen, which allows an immunological reaction with the antigen. Antibodies include recombinant proteins compπsing the binding domains, as wells as fragments, including Fab, Fab', F(ab) 2 , and F(ab') 2 fragments. As used herein, an "antigenic determinant" is the portion of an antigen molecule, in this case a PG-3 polypeptide, that determines the specificity ofthe antigen-antibody reaction. An "epitope" refers to an antigenic determinant of a polypeptide. An epitope can comprise as few as 3 amino acids in a spatial conformation which is unique to the epitope. Generally an epitope consists of at least 6 such amino acids, and more usually at least 8-10 such amino acids. Methods for determining the amino acids which make up an epitope include x-ray crystallography, 2- dimensional nuclear magnetic resonance, and epitope mapping e.g. the Pepscan method descnbed by Geysen et α/ 1984; PCT Publication No. WO 84/03564; and PCT Publication No. WO 84/03506. Throughout the present specification, the expression "nucleotide sequence" may be employed to designate indifferently a polynucleotide or a nucleic acid. More precisely, the expression "nucleotide sequence" encompasses the nucleic material itself and is thus not restricted to the sequence information (/ e. the succession of letters chosen among the four base letters) that biochemically charactenzes a specific DNA or RNA molecule. As used interchangeably herein, the terms "nucleic acids", "oligonucleotides", and "polynucleotides" include RNA, DNA, or RNA/DNA hybrid sequences of more than one nucleotide in either single chain or duplex form. The term "nucleotide" as used herein as an adjective to describe molecules comprising RNA, DNA, or RNA/DNA hybπd sequences of any length in single-stranded or duplex form. The term "nucleotide" is also used herein as a noun to refer to individual nucleotides or vaπeties of nucleotides, meaning a molecule, or individual unit in a larger nucleic acid molecule, comprising a punne or pynmidine, a nbose or deoxyribose sugar moiety, and a phosphate group, or phosphodiester linkage in the case of nucleotides within an oligonucleotide or polynucleotide. The term "nucleotide" is also used herein to encompass "modified nucleotides" which comprise at least one of the following modifications (a) an alternative linking group, (b) an analogous form of punne, (c) an analogous form of pynmidine, or (d) an analogous sugar, for examples of analogous linking groups, punne, pyπmidines, and sugars see for example PCT publication No. WO 95/04064. The polynucleotide sequences ofthe invention may be prepared by any known method, including synthetic, recombinant, ex vivo generation, or a combination thereof, as well as utilizing any punfication methods known in the art. A "promoter" refers to a DNA sequence recognized by the synthetic machinery ofthe cell required to initiate the specific transcription of a gene. A sequence which is "operably linked" to a regulatory sequence such as a promoter means that said regulatory element is in the correct location and orientation in relation to the nucleic acid to control RNA polymerase initiation and expression of the nucleic acid of interest. As used herein, the term "operably linked" refers to a linkage of polynucleotide elements in a functional relationship. For instance, a promoter or enhancer is operably linked to a coding sequence if it affects the transcription ofthe coding sequence. More precisely, two DNA molecules (such as a polynucleotide containing a promoter region and a polynucleotide encoding a desired polypeptide or polynucleotide) are said to be "operably linked" if the nature ofthe linkage between the two polynucleotides does not (1) result in the introduction of a frame-shift mutation or (2) interfere with the ability ofthe polynucleotide containing the promoter to direct the transcription of the coding polynucleotide. The term "primer" denotes a specific oligonucleotide sequence which is complementary to a target nucleotide sequence and used to hybridize to the target nucleotide sequence. A primer serves as an initiation point for nucleotide polymerization catalyzed by either DNA polymerase, RNA polymerase or reverse transcriptase. The term "probe" denotes a defined nucleic acid segment (or nucleotide analog segment, e.g., polynucleotide as defined herein) which can be used to identify a specific polynucleotide sequence present in samples, said nucleic acid segment comprising a nucleotide sequence complementary ofthe specific polynucleotide sequence to be identified. The terms "trait" and "phenotype" are used interchangeably herein and refer to any visible, detectable or otherwise measurable property of an organism such as symptoms of, or susceptibility to a disease for example. Typically the terms "trait" or "phenotype" are used herein to refer to symptoms of, or susceptibility to a disease, a beneficial response to or side effects related to a treatment. Preferably, said trait can be, without being limited to, cancers, developmental diseases, and neurological diseases. The term "allele" is used herein to refer to variants of a nucleotide sequence. A biallelic polymoφhism has two forms. Typically the first identified allele is designated as the original allele whereas other alleles are designated as alternative alleles. Diploid organisms may be homozygous or heterozygous for an allelic form. The term "heterozygosity rate" is used herein to refer to the incidence of individuals in a population which are heterozygous at a particular allele. In a biallelic system, the heterozygosity rate is on average equal to 2P a (l-P a ), where P a is the frequency ofthe least common allele. In order to be useful in genetic studies, a genetic marker should have an adequate level of heterozygosity to allow a reasonable probability that a randomly selected person will be heterozygous. The term "genotype" as used herein refers the identity ofthe alleles present in an individual or a sample. In the context ofthe present invention, a genotype preferably refers to the description ofthe biallelic marker alleles present in an individual or a sample. The term "genotyping" a sample or an individual for a biallelic marker consists of determining the specific allele or the specific nucleotide carried by an individual at a biallelic marker. The term "mutation" as used herein refers to a difference in DNA sequence between or among different genomes or individuals which has a frequency below 1%. The term "haplotype" refers to a combination of alleles present in an individual or a sample. In the context of the present invention, a haplotype preferably refers to a combination of biallelic marker alleles found in a given individual and which may be associated with a phenotype. The term "polymoφhism" as used herein refers to the occurrence of two or more alternative genomic sequences or alleles between or among different genomes or individuals. "Polymoφhic" refers to the condition in which two or more variants of a specific genomic sequence can be found in a population. A "polymorphic site" is the locus at which the variation occurs. A single nucleotide polymoφhism is the replacement of one nucleotide by another nucleotide at the polymoφhic site. Deletion of a single nucleotide or insertion of a single nucleotide also gives rise to single nucleotide polymorphisms. In the context ofthe present invention, "single nucleotide polymoφhism" preferably refers to a single nucleotide substitution. Typically, between different individuals, the polymoφhic site may be occupied by two different nucleotides. The term "biallelic polymoφhism" and "biallelic marker" are used interchangeably herein to refer to a single nucleotide polymoφhism having two alleles at a fairly high frequency in the population. A "biallelic marker allele" refers to the nucleotide variants present at a biallelic marker site. Typically, the frequency ofthe less common allele of the biallelic markers ofthe present invention has been validated to be greater than 1%, preferably the frequency is greater than 10%, more preferably the frequency is at least 20% (i.e. heterozygosity rate of at least 0.32), even more preferably the frequency is at least 30% (i.e. heterozygosity rate of at least 0.42). A biallelic marker wherein the frequency ofthe less common allele is 30% or more is termed a "high quality biallelic marker". The location of nucleotides in a polynucleotide with respect to the center ofthe polynucleotide are described herein in the following manner. When a polynucleotide has an odd number of nucleotides, the nucleotide at an equal distance from the 3' and 5' ends ofthe polynucleotide is considered to be "at the center" ofthe polynucleotide, and any nucleotide immediately adjacent to the nucleotide at the center, or the nucleotide at the center itself is considered to be "within 1 nucleotide ofthe center." With an odd number of nucleotides in a polynucleotide any of the five nucleotides positions in the middle of the polynucleotide would be considered to be within 2 nucleotides of the center, and so on. When a polynucleotide has an even number of nucleotides, there would be a bond and not a nucleotide at the center ofthe polynucleotide. Thus, either ofthe two central nucleotides would be considered to be "within 1 nucleotide ofthe center" and any ofthe four nucleotides in the middle ofthe polynucleotide would be considered to be "within 2 nucleotides ofthe center", and so on. For polymorphisms which involve the substitution, insertion or deletion of 1 or more nucleotides, the polymoφhism, allele or biallelic marker is "at the center" of a polynucleotide if the difference between the distance from the substituted, inserted, or deleted polynucleotides of the polymoφhism and the 3' end of the polynucleotide, and the distance from the substituted, inserted, or deleted polynucleotides of the polymoφhism and the 5' end of the polynucleotide is zero or one nucleotide. If this difference is 0 to 3, then the polymoφhism is considered to be "within 1 nucleotide ofthe center." If the difference is 0 to 5, the polymoφhism is considered to be "within 2 nucleotides ofthe center." If the difference is 0 to 7, the polymoφhism is considered to be "within 3 nucleotides ofthe center," and so on. The term "upstream" is used herein to refer to a location which is toward the 5' end of the polynucleotide from a specific reference point. The terms "base paired" and "Watson & Crick base paired" are used interchangeably herein to refer to nucleotides which can be hydrogen bonded to one another be virtue of their sequence identities in a manner like that found in double-helical DNA with thymine or uracil residues linked to adenine residues by two hydrogen bonds and cytosine and guanine residues linked by three hydrogen bonds (See Shyer, L., 1995). The terms "complementary" or "complement thereof are used herein to refer to the sequences of polynucleotides which is capable of forming Watson & Crick base pairing with another specified polynucleotide throughout the entirety ofthe complementary region. For the puφose ofthe present invention, a first polynucleotide is deemed to be complementary to a second polynucleotide when each base in the first polynucleotide is paired with its complementary base. Complementary bases are, generally, A and T (or A and U), or C and G. "Complement" is used herein as a synonym of "complementary polynucleotide", "complementary nucleic acid" and "complementary nucleotide sequence". These terms are applied to pairs of polynucleotides based solely upon their sequences and not any particular set of conditions under which the two polynucleotides would actually bind. Variants and Fragments 1- Polynucleotides The invention also relates to variants and fragments ofthe polynucleotides described herein, particularly of a PG-3 gene containing one or more biallelic markers according to the invention. Variants of polynucleotides, as the term is used herein, are polynucleotides that differ from a reference polynucleotide. A variant of a polynucleotide may be a naturally occurring variant such as a naturally occurring allelic variant, or it may be a variant that is not known to occur naturally. Such non-naturally occurring variants ofthe polynucleotide may be made by mutagenesis techniques, including those applied to polynucleotides, cells or organisms. Generally, differences are limited so that the nucleotide sequences of the reference and the vanant are closely similar overall and, in many regions, identical. Variants of polynucleotides according to the invention include, without being limited to, nucleotide sequences which are at least 95% identical to a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2 or to any polynucleotide fragment of at least 12 consecutive nucleotides of a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2, and preferably at least 99% identical, more particularly at least 99 5% identical, and most preferably at least 99.8% identical to a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2, or to any polynucleotide fragment of at least 12 consecutive nucleotides of a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2. Nucleotide changes present in a vanant polynucleotide may be silent, which means that they do not alter the ammo acids encoded by the polynucleotide. However, nucleotide changes may also result in ammo acid substitutions, additions, deletions, fusions and truncations in the polypeptide encoded by the reference sequence. The substitutions, deletions or additions may involve one or more nucleotides. The vanants may be altered in coding or non-codmg regions or both. Alterations in the coding regions may produce conservative or non-conservative amino acid substitutions, deletions or additions. In the context of the present invention, particularly preferred embodiments are those in which the polynucleotides encode polypeptides which retain substantially the same biological function or activity as the mature PG-3 protein, or those in which the polynucleotides encode polypeptides which maintain or increase a particular biological activity, while reducing a second biological activity. A polynucleotide fragment is a polynucleotide having a sequence that is entirely the same as part but not all of a given nucleotide sequence, preferably the nucleotide sequence of a PG-3 gene, and variants thereof. The fragment can be a portion of an intron or an exon of a PG-3 gene. It can also be a portion of the regulatory regions of PG-3. Preferably, such fragments comprise at least one ofthe biallelic markers Al to A80 or the complements thereto or a biallelic marker in linkage disequihbnum with one or more ofthe biallelic markers Al to A80. Such fragments may be "free-standing", i.e not part of or fused to other polynucleotides, or they may be comprised within a single larger polynucleotide of which they form a part or region. Indeed, several of these fragments may be present within a single larger polynucleotide. Optionally, such fragments may comprise, consist of, or consist essentially of a contiguous span of at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500 or 1000 nucleotides in length. A set of preferred fragments contain at least one ofthe biallelic markers Al to A80 ofthe PG-3 gene which are descnbed herein or the complements thereto. 2- Polypeptides The invention also relates to vanants, fragments, analogs and derivatives of the polypeptides descnbed herein, including mutated PG-3 proteins. The variant may be 1) one in which one or more of the ammo acid residues are substituted with a conserved or non-conserved amino acid residue and such substituted ammo acid residue may or may not be one encoded by the genetic code, or 2) one in which one or more of the ammo acid residues includes a substituent group, or 3) one in which the mutated PG-3 is fused with another compound, such as a compound to increase the half-life of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol), or 4) one in which the additional ammo acids are fused to the mutated PG-3, such as a leader or secretory sequence or a sequence which is employed for punfication ofthe mutated PG-3 or a preprotein sequence. Such variants are deemed to be within the scope of those skilled in the art. A polypeptide fragment is a polypeptide having a sequence that is entirely the same as part but not all of a given polypeptide sequence, preferably a polypeptide encoded by a PG-3 gene and vanants thereof. In the case of an amino acid substitution in the ammo acid sequence of a polypeptide according to the invention, one or several amino acids can be replaced by "equivalent" ammo acids. The expression "equivalent" amino acid is used herein to designate any amino acid that may be substituted for one ofthe amino acids having similar properties, such that one skilled in the art of peptide chemistry would expect the secondary structure and hydropathic nature ofthe polypeptide to be substantially unchanged. Generally, the following groups of ammo acids represent equivalent changes: (1) Ala, Pro, Gly, Glu, Asp, Gin, Asn, Ser, Thr; (2) Cys, Ser, Tyr, Thr; (3) Val, lie, Leu, Met, Ala, Phe; (4) Lys, Arg, His; (5) Phe, Tyr, Tφ, His. A specific embodiment of a modified PG-3 peptide molecule of interest according to the present invention, includes, but is not limited to, a peptide molecule which is resistant to proteolysis, a peptide m which the -CONH- peptide bond is modified and replaced by a (CH2NH) reduced bond, a (NHCO) retro inverso bond, a (CH2-0) methylene-oxy bond, a (CH2-S) thiomethylene bond, a (CH2CH2) carba bond, a (CO-CH2) cetomethylene bond, a (CHOH-CH2) hydroxyethylene bond), a (N-N) bound, a E-alcene bond or also a -CH=CH- bond. The invention also encompasses a human PG-3 polypeptide or a fragment or a vanant thereof m which at least one peptide bond has been modified as descnbed above. Such fragments may be "free-standing", i e not part of or fused to other polypeptides, or they may be included within a single larger polypeptide of which they form a part or region. However, several fragments may be included withm a single larger polypeptide. As representative examples of polypeptide fragments ofthe invention, there may be mentioned those which are from about 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 to 15, 10 to 20, 15 to 40, or 30 to 55 amino acids long. Preferred are those fragments containing at least one amino acid mutation in the PG-3 protein. Identity Between Nucleic Acids Or Polypeptides The terms "percentage of sequence identity" and "percentage homology" are used 5 interchangeably herein to refer to comparisons among polynucleotides and polypeptides, and are determined by comparing two optimally aligned sequences over a companson window, wherein the portion ofthe polynucleotide or polypeptide sequence in the comparison window may compnse additions or deletions (i e. , gaps) as compared to the reference sequence (which does not comprise additions or deletions) for optimal alignment of the two sequences. The percentage is calculated by 10 determining the number of positions at which the identical nucleic acid base or ammo acid residue occurs in both sequences to yield the number of matched positions, dividing the number of matched positions by the total number of positions in the window of comparison and multiplying the result by 100 to yield the percentage of sequence identity. Homology is evaluated using any of the vanety of sequence comparison algorithms and programs known in the art. Such algonthms and programs 15 include, but are by no means limited to, TBLASTN, BLASTP, FASTA, TFASTA, and CLUSTALW (Pearson and Lipman, 1988; Altschul et al , 1990; Thompson et al, 1994; Higgms et al , 1996; Altschul et al, 1993). In a particularly preferred embodiment, protein and nucleic acid sequence homologies are evaluated using the Basic Local Alignment Search Tool ("BLAST") which is well known in the art (see, e.g., Karhn and Altschul, 1990; Altschul et al, 1990, 1993, 20 1997) In particular, five specific BLAST programs are used to perform the following task: (1) BLASTP and BLAST3 compare an ammo acid query sequence against a protein sequence database, (2) BLASTN compares a nucleotide query sequence against a nucleotide sequence database; 25 (3) BLASTX compares the six-frame conceptual translation products of a query nucleotide sequence (both strands) against a protein sequence database; (4) TBLASTN compares a query protein sequence against a nucleotide sequence database translated in all six reading frames (both strands); and (5) TBLASTX compares the six-frame translations of a nucleotide query sequence against 30 the six-frame translations of a nucleotide sequence database. The BLAST programs identify homologous sequences by identifying similar segments, which are referred to herein as "high-scoring segment pairs," between a query amino or nucleic acid sequence and a test sequence which is preferably obtained from a protein or nucleic acid sequence database. High-scoπng segment pairs are preferably identified (i.e , aligned) by means of a scoring 35 matrix, many of which are known in the art. Preferably, the scoπng matrix used is the BLOSUM62 matrix (Gonnet et al , 1992; Hemkoff and Henikoff, 1993). Less preferably, the PAM or PAM250 matrices may also be used (see, e.g., Schwartz and Dayhoff, eds., 1978). The BLAST programs evaluate the statistical significance of all high-scoring segment pairs identified, and preferably selects those segments which satisfy a user-specified threshold of significance, such as a user- specified percent homology. Preferably, the statistical significance of a high-scoring segment pair is evaluated using the statistical significance formula of Karhn (see, e.g., Karhn and Altschul, 5 1990). The BLAST programs may be used with the default parameters which are implemented in the absence of further instructions from the user. Alternatively, the BLAST programs may be used with parameters specified by the user. Stringent Hybridization Conditions By way of example and not limitation, procedures using conditions of high stπngency are 10 as follows: Prehybridization of filters containing DNA is carried out for 8 h to overnight at 65°C in buffer composed of 6X SSC, 50 mM Tπs-HCl (pH 7.5), 1 mM EDTA, 0.02% PVP, 0.02% Ficoll, 0.02%) BSA, and 500 μg/ml denatured salmon sperm DNA. Filters are hybridized for 48 h at 65°C, the preferred hybridization temperature, in prehybridization mixture containing 100 μg/ml denatured salmon sperm DNA and 5-20 X 10 6 cpm of 32 P-labeled probe. Alternatively, the 15 hybridization step can be performed at 65°C in the presence of SSC buffer, IX SSC corresponding to 0.15M NaCl and 0.05 M Na citrate. Subsequently, filter washes can be done at 37°C for 1 h in a solution containing 2X SSC, 0.01% PVP, 0.01% Ficoll, and 0.01% BSA, followed by a wash in 0.1X SSC at 50°C for 45 min. Alternatively, filter washes can be performed in a solution containing 2X SSC and 0.1% SDS, or 0.5X SSC and 0.1% SDS, or 0.1X SSC and 0.1% SDS at 20 68°C for 15 minute intervals. Following the wash steps, the hybridized probes are detectable by autoradiography. Other conditions of high stπngency which may be used are well known in the art and are cited in Sambrook et al , 1989; and Ausubel et al , 1989. These hybndization conditions are suitable for a nucleic acid molecule of about 20 nucleotides in length. There is no need to say that the hybndization conditions described above are to be adapted according to the length of the 25 desired nucleic acid, following techniques well known to the one skilled in the art. The suitable hybridization conditions may for example be adapted according to the teachings disclosed in Hames and Higg s (1985) or in Sambrook et al (1989). GENOMIC SEQUENCES OF THE PG-3 GENE The present invention concerns the genomic sequence of PG-3. The present invention 30 encompasses the PG-3 gene, or PG-3 genomic sequences consisting of, consisting essentially of, or compπsing the sequence of SEQ ID No 1 , sequences complementary thereto, as well as fragments and variants thereof. These polynucleotides may be punfied, isolated, or recombinant. The invention also encompasses a punfied, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotide compπsing a nucleotide sequence having at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, or 95% nucleotide identity with 35 the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1 or a complementary sequence thereto or a fragment thereof. The nucleotide differences with regard to the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1 may be generally randomly distributed throughout the entire nucleic acid. Nevertheless, preferred nucleic acids are those wherein the nucleotide differences as regards to the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1 are predominantly located outside the coding sequences contained in the exons. These nucleic acids, as well as their fragments and variants, may be used as oligonucleotide primers or probes in order to detect the presence of a copy of the PG-3 gene in a test sample, or alternatively in order to amplify a target nucleotide sequence within the PG-3 sequences. Another object ofthe invention relates to a punfied, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid that hybridizes with the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1 or a complementary sequence thereto or a vanant thereof, under the stnngent hybridization conditions as defined above. Particularly preferred nucleic acids ofthe invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1: 1-97921, 98517-103471, 103603-108222, 108390-109221, 109324- 114409, 114538-115723, 115957-122102, 122225-126876, 127033-157212, 157808-240825. Additional preferred nucleic acids ofthe invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1 : 1-10000, 10001-20000, 20001-30000, 30001-40000, 40001-50000, 50001-60000, 60001-70000, 70001-80000, 80001-90000, 90001-97921, 98517-103471, 103603- 108222, 108390-109221, 109324-114409, 114538-115723, 115957-122102, 122225-126876, 127033-157212, 157808-159000, 159001-160000, 160001-170000, 170001-180000, 180001- 190000, 190001-200000, 200001-210000, 210001-220000, 220001-230000, 230001-240825. It should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides descπbed in this section. The PG-3 genomic nucleic acid compπses 14 exons. The exon positions in SEQ ID No 1 are detailed below in Table A. Table A Thus, the invention embodies punfied, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the 14 exons ofthe PG-3 gene, or a sequence complementary thereto The invention also relates to purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a combination of at least two exons ofthe PG-3 gene, wherein the polynucleotides are arranged withm the nucleic acid, from the 5'-end to the 3'-end of said nucleic acid, in the same order as in SEQ ID No 1. Intron A-B refers to the nucleotide sequence located between Exon A and Exon B, and so on. The position ofthe introns is detailed in Table A. The intron J-K is large. Indeed, it is 120 kb in length and comprises the whole angiopoietine gene. Thus, the invention embodies punfied, isolated, or recombinant polynucleotides compπsing a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting ofthe 13 mtrons ofthe PG-3 gene, or a sequence complementary thereto. While this section is entitled "Genomic Sequences of PG-3," it should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be comprised by the polynucleotides described in this section, flank g the genomic sequences of PG-3 on either side or between two or more such genomic sequences. PG-3 CDNA SEQUENCES The expression ofthe PG-3 gene has been shown to lead to the production of at least one mRNA species which nucleic acid sequence is set forth in SEQ ID No 2. Three cDNAs have been independently cloned. They all have the same size but exhibit strong polymoφhism between each other and between each cDNA and the genomic seqeunce. These polymoφhisms are indicated in the appended sequence listing by the use ofthe feature "variation" in SEQ ID No 2. Another object ofthe invention is a punfied, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid comprising the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 2, complementary sequences thereto, as well as allelic vanants, and fragments thereof. Moreover, preferred polynucleotides ofthe invention include punfied, isolated, or recombinant PG-3 cDNAs consisting of, consisting essentially of, or comprising the sequence of SEQ ID No 2. Particularly preferred nucleic acids ofthe invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides compπsing a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof. Additional preferred embodiments ofthe invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides compπsing a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 2: 1-500, 501-1000, 1001-1500, 1501-2000, 2001- 2500, 2501-3000, 3001-3500, 3501-3809. The invention also pertains to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide having at least 80, 85, 90, or 95% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide of SEQ ID No 2, advantageously 99 % nucleotide identity, preferably 99.5% nucleotide identity and most preferably 99.8% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide of SEQ ID No 2, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment thereof. Another object ofthe invention relates to purified, isolated or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a polynucleotide that hybridizes, under the stringent hybridization conditions defined herein, with a polynucleotide of SEQ ID No 2, or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof or a biologically active fragment thereof. The cDNA of SEQ ID No 2 includes a 5'-UTR region starting from the nucleotide at position 1 and ending at the nucleotide in position 57 of SEQ ID No 2. The cDNA of SEQ ID No 2 includes a 3'-UTR region starting from the nucleotide at position 2566 and ending at the nucleotide at position 3809 of SEQ ID No 2 The polyadenylation signal starts from the nucleotide at position 3795 and ends at the nucleotide in position 3800 of SEQ ID No 2. Consequently, the invention concerns a punfied, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid compπsing a nucleotide sequence ofthe 5'UTR ofthe PG-3 cDNA, a sequence complementary thereto, or an allelic vanant thereof. The invention also concerns a purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid comprising a nucleotide sequence ofthe 3'UTR of he PG-3 cDNA, a sequence complementary thereto, or an allelic variant thereof. While this section is entitled "PG-3 cDNA Sequences," it should be noted that nucleic acid fragments of any size and sequence may also be compπsed by the polynucleotides descnbed in this section, flanking the PG-3 sequences on either side or between two or more such PG-3 sequences. CODING REGIONS The PG-3 open reading frame is contained in the corresponding mRNA of SEQ ID No 2. More precisely, the effective PG-3 coding sequence (CDS) includes the region between nucleotide position 58 (first nucleotide ofthe ATG codon) and nucleotide position 2565 (end nucleotide of the TGA codon) of SEQ ID No 2. The present invention also embodies isolated, purified, and recombinant polynucleotides which encode a polypeptide compπsing a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 or 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ ID No 3. Preferably, the present invention also embodies isolated, punfied, and recombinant polynucleotides which encode a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 or 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3, wherein wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following amino acid positions of SEQ ID No 3: 1-100, 101-200, 201-300, 301-400, 401- 500, 501-600, 601-700, 701-835. The above disclosed polynucleotide that contains the coding sequence of the PG-3 gene may be expressed in a desired host cell or a desired host organism, when this polynucleotide is placed under the control of suitable expression signals. The expression signals may be either the expression signals contained in the regulatory regions in the PG-3 gene of the invention or in contrast the signals may be exogenous regulatory nucleic sequences. Such a polynucleotide, when placed under the suitable expression signals, may also be inserted in a vector for its expression and/or amplification. REGULATORY SEQUENCES OF PG-3 As mentioned, the genomic sequence of the PG-3 gene contains regulatory sequences both in the non-transcribed 5 '-flanking region and in the non-transcribed 3 '-flanking region that border the PG-3 coding region containing the 14 exons of this gene. The 5' regulatory region of the PG-3 gene is localized between the nucleotide in position 1 and the nucleotide in position 2000 of the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1. The 3' regulatory region ofthe PG-3 gene is localized between nucleotide position 238826 and nucleotide position 240825 of SEQ ID No 1. Polynucleotides derived from the 5' and 3' regulatory regions are useful in order to detect the presence of at least a copy of a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1 or a fragment thereof in a test sample. The promoter activity of the 5' regulatory regions contained in PG-3 can be assessed as described below. In order to identify the relevant biologically active polynucleotide fragments or variants of SEQ ID No 1, one of skill in the art will refer to the book of Sambrook et α/.(1989) which describes the use of a recombinant vector carrying a marker gene (i.e. beta galactosidase, chloramphenicol acetyl transferase, etc.) the expression of which will be detected when placed under the control of a biologically active polynucleotide fragments or variants of SEQ ID No 1. Genomic sequences located upstream of the first exon ofthe PG-3 gene are cloned into a suitable promoter reporter vector, such as the pSEAP-Basic, pSEAP-Enhancer, pβgal-Basic, pβgal-Enhancer, or pEGFP-1 Promoter Reporter vectors available from Clontech, or pGL2-basic or pGL3 -basic promoter less luciferase reporter gene vector from Promega. Briefly, each of these promoter reporter vectors include multiple cloning sites positioned upstream of a reporter gene encoding a readily assayable protein such as secreted alkaline phosphatase, luciferase, β galactosidase, or green fluorescent protein. The sequences upstream the PG-3 coding region are inserted into the cloning sites upstream of the reporter gene in both orientations and introduced into an appropriate host cell. The level of reporter protein is assayed and compared to the level obtained from a vector which lacks an insert in the cloning site. The presence of an elevated expression level in the vector containing the insert with respect to the control vector indicates the presence of a promoter in the insert. If necessary, the upstream sequences can be cloned into vectors which contain an enhancer for increasing transcription levels from weak promoter sequences. A significant level of expression above that observed with the vector lacking an insert indicates that a promoter sequence is present in the inserted upstream sequence. Promoter sequences within the upstream genomic DNA may be further defined by constructing nested 5' and/or 3' deletions in the upstream DNA using conventional techniques such as Exonuclease III or appropriate restriction endonuclease digestion. The resulting deletion fragments can be inserted into the promoter reporter vector to determine whether the deletion has reduced or obliterated promoter activity, such as described, for example, by Coles et α/.(1998). In this way, the boundaries of the promoters may be defined. If desired, potential individual regulatory sites within the promoter may be identified using site directed mutagenesis or linker scanning to obliterate potential transcription factor binding sites within the promoter individually or in combination. The effects of these mutations on transcription levels may be determined by inserting the mutations into cloning sites in promoter reporter vectors. This type of assay is well- known to those skilled in the art and is described in WO 97/17359, US Patent No. 5,374,544; EP 582 796; US Patent No. 5,698,389; US 5,643,746; US Patent No. 5,502,176; and US Patent 5,266,488. The strength and the specificity of the promoter ofthe PG-3 gene can be assessed through the expression levels of a detectable polynucleotide operably linked to the PG-3 promoter in different types of cells and tissues. The detectable polynucleotide may be either a polynucleotide that specifically hybridizes with a predefined oligonucleotide probe, or a polynucleotide encoding a detectable protein, including a PG-3 polypeptide or a fragment or a variant thereof. This type of assay is well-known to those skilled in the art and is described in US Patent No. 5,502,176; and US Patent No. 5,266,488. Some of the methods are discussed in more detail below. Polynucleotides carrying the regulatory elements located at the 5' end and at the 3' end of the PG-3 coding region may be advantageously used to control the transcriptional and translational activity of an heterologous polynucleotide of interest. Thus, the present invention also concerns a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide which is selected from the group consisting ofthe 5' and 3' regulatory regions, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof. The invention also pertains to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide having at least 80, 85, 90, or 95% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting ofthe 5' and 3' regulatory regions, advantageously 99 % nucleotide identity, preferably 99.5% nucleotide identity and most preferably 99.8% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting ofthe 5' and 3' regulatory regions, or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof or a biologically active fragment thereof. Another object ofthe invention relates to purified, isolated or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a polynucleotide that hybridizes, under the stringent hybridization conditions defined herein, with a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of the 5'- and 3' regulatory regions, or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof or a biologically active fragment thereof. Preferred fragments ofthe 5' regulatory region have a length of about 1500 or 1000 nucleotides, preferably of about 500 nucleotides, more preferably about 400 nucleotides, even more preferably 300 nucleotides and most preferably about 200 nucleotides. Preferred fragments ofthe 3' regulatory region are at least 50, 100, 150, 200, 300 or 400 bases in length. "Biologically active" polynucleotide derivatives of SEQ ID No 1 are polynucleotides comprising or alternatively consisting essentially of or consisting of a fragment of said polynucleotide which is functional as a regulatory region for expressing a recombinant polypeptide or a recombinant polynucleotide in a recombinant cell host. It could act either as an enhancer or as a repressor. For the puφose ofthe invention, a nucleic acid or polynucleotide is "functional" as a regulatory region for expressing a recombinant polypeptide or a recombinant polynucleotide if said regulatory polynucleotide contains nucleotide sequences which contain transcriptional and translational regulatory information, and such sequences are "operably linked" to nucleotide sequences which encode the desired polypeptide or the desired polynucleotide. The regulatory polynucleotides ofthe invention may be prepared from the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1 by cleavage using suitable restriction enzymes, as described for example in the book of Sambrook et α/.(1989). The regulatory polynucleotides may also be prepared by digestion of SEQ ID No 1 by an exonuclease enzyme, such as Bal31 (Wabiko et al, 1986). These regulatory polynucleotides can also be prepared by nucleic acid chemical synthesis, as described elsewhere in the specification. The regulatory polynucleotides according to the invention may be part of a recombinant expression vector that may be used to express a coding sequence in a desired host cell or host organism. The recombinant expression vectors according to the invention are described elsewhere in the specification. A preferred 5 '-regulatory polynucleotide ofthe invention includes the 5 '-untranslated region (5'-UTR) ofthe PG-3 cDNA, or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof. A preferred 3 '-regulatory polynucleotide ofthe invention includes the 3 '-untranslated region (3'-UTR) of the PG-3 cDNA, or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof. A further object of the invention relates to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising: a) a nucleic acid comprising a regulatory nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of: (1) a nucleotide sequence compπsing a polynucleotide ofthe 5' regulatory region or a complementary sequence thereto; or (n) a nucleotide sequence comprising a polynucleotide having at least 80, 85, 90, or 95% of nucleotide identity with the nucleotide sequence ofthe 5' regulatory region or a complementary sequence thereto; or (in) a nucleotide sequence comprising a polynucleotide that hybndizes under stringent hybridization conditions with the nucleotide sequence ofthe 5' regulatory region or a complementary sequence thereto; or (IV) a biologically active fragment or variant of the polynucleotides in (l), (n) and (in); b) a polynucleotide encoding a desired polypeptide or a nucleic acid of interest, operably linked to the nucleic acid defined in (a) above; c) Optionally, a nucleic acid compπsing a 3'- regulatory polynucleotide, preferably a 3'- regulatory polynucleotide of the PG-3 gene. In a specific embodiment ofthe nucleic acid defined above, said nucleic acid includes the 5 '-untranslated region (5'-UTR) ofthe PG-3 cDNA, or a biologically active fragment or vanant thereof. In a second specific embodiment ofthe nucleic acid defined above, said nucleic acid includes the 3 '-untranslated region (3'-UTR) ofthe PG-3 cDNA, or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof. The regulatory polynucleotide of the 5' regulatory region, or its biologically active fragments or vanants, is operably linked at the 5'-end ofthe polynucleotide encoding the desired polypeptide or polynucleotide. The regulatory polynucleotide of the 3' regulatory region, or its biologically active fragments or vanants, is advantageously operably linked at the 3'-end ofthe polynucleotide encoding the desired polypeptide or polynucleotide. The desired polypeptide encoded by the above-descnbed nucleic acid may be of various nature or ongm, encompassing proteins of prokaryotic or eukaryotic ongin. Among the polypeptides which may be expressed under the control of a PG-3 regulatory region are bacteπal, fungal or viral antigens. Also encompassed are eukaryotic proteins such as intracellular proteins, like "house keeping" proteins, membrane-bound proteins, like receptors, and secreted proteins like endogenous mediators such as cytokines. The desired polypeptide may be the PG-3 protein, especially the protein of the ammo acid sequence of SEQ ID No 3, or a fragment or a vanant thereof. The desired nucleic acids encoded by the above-described polynucleotide, usually an RNA molecule, may be complementary to a desired coding polynucleotide, for example to the PG-3 coding sequence, and thus useful as an antisense polynucleotide. Such a polynucleotide may be included in a recombinant expression vector in order to express the desired polypeptide or the desired nucleic acid in host cell or in a host organism. Suitable recombinant vectors that contain a polynucleotide such as described herein are disclosed elsewhere in the specification. POLYNUCLEOTIDE CONSTRUCTS The terms "polynucleotide construct" and "recombinant polynucleotide" are used interchangeably herein to refer to linear or circular, purified or isolated polynucleotides that have been artificially designed and which comprise at least two nucleotide sequences that are not found as contiguous nucleotide sequences in their initial natural environment. DNA Construct That Enables Temporal And Spatial PG-3 Gene Expression In Recombinant Cell Hosts And In Transgenic Animals. In order to study the physiological and phenotypic consequences of a lack of synthesis of the PG-3 protein, both at the cell level and at the multi cellular organism level, the invention also encompasses DNA constructs and recombinant vectors enabling a conditional expression of a specific allele ofthe PG-3 genomic sequence or cDNA and also of a copy of this genomic sequence or cDNA harboring substitutions, deletions, or additions of one or more bases as regards to the PG- 3 nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2, or a fragment thereof, these base substitutions, deletions or additions being located either in an exon, an intron or a regulatory sequence, but preferably in the 5'-regulatory sequence or in an exon ofthe PG-3 genomic sequence or within the PG-3 cDNA of SEQ ID No 2. In a preferred embodiment, the PG-3 sequence comprises a biallelic marker of the present invention. In a preferred embodiment, the PG-3 sequence comprises at least one ofthe biallelic markers Al to A80. The present invention embodies recombinant vectors comprising any one ofthe polynucleotides described in the present invention. More particularly, the polynucleotide constructs according to the present invention can comprise any of the polynucleotides described in the "Genomic Sequences Of The PG3 Gene" section, the "PG-3 cDNA Sequences" section, the "Coding Regions" section, and the "Oligonucleotide Probes And Primers" section. A first preferred DNA construct is based on the tetracycline resistance operon tet from E. coli transposon TnlO for controlling the PG-3 gene expression, such as described by Gossen et al(l992, 1995) and Furth et α/.(1994). Such a DNA construct contains seven tet operator sequences from TnlO (tetop) that are fused to either a minimal promoter or a 5 '-regulatory sequence of the PG-3 gene, said minimal promoter or said PG-3 regulatory sequence being operably linked to a polynucleotide of interest that codes either for a sense or an antisense oligonucleotide or for a polypeptide, including a PG-3 polypeptide or a peptide fragment thereof. This DNA construct is functional as a conditional expression system for the nucleotide sequence of interest when the same cell also comprises a nucleotide sequence coding for either the wild type (tTA) or the mutant (rTA) repressor fused to the activating domain of viral protein VP16 of heφes simplex virus, placed under the control of a promoter, such as the HCMVIE1 enhancer/promoter or the MMTV-LTR Indeed, a preferred DNA construct ofthe invention comprises both the polynucleotide containing the tet operator sequences and the polynucleotide containing a sequence coding for the tTA or the rTA repressor. In a specific embodiment, the conditional expression DNA construct contains the sequence encodmg the mutant tetracychne repressor rTA, the expression ofthe polynucleotide of interest is silent in the absence of tetracychne and induced in its presence. DNA Constructs Allowing Homologous Recombination: Replacement Vectors A second preferred DNA construct comprises, from 5'-end to 3'-end: (a) a first nucleotide sequence that is included withm the PG-3 genomic sequence; (b) a nucleotide sequence comprising a positive selection marker, such as the marker for neomycine resistance (neo); and (c) a second nucleotide sequence that is included within the PG-3 genomic sequence, and is located on the genome downstream the first PG-3 nucleotide sequence (a). In a preferred embodiment, this DNA construct also compπses a negative selection marker located upstream of the nucleotide sequence (a) or downstream from the nucleotide sequence (c). Preferably, the negative selection marker compnses ofthe thymidine kinase (tk) gene (Thomas et al , 1986), the hygromycine beta gene (Te Riele et al , 1990), the hprt gene (Van der Lugt et al , 1991; Reid et al , 1990) or the Dφhtena toxin A fragment (Dt-A) gene (Nada et al, 1993; Yagi et al 1990). Preferably, the positive selection marker is located withm a PG-3 exon sequence so as to interrupt the sequence encoding a PG-3 protein. These replacement vectors are descnbed, for example, by Thomas et α/.(1986; 1987), Mansour et al (1988) and Koller et al (1992). The first and second nucleotide sequences (a) and (c) may be indifferently located withm a PG-3 regulatory sequence, an mtromc sequence, an exon sequence or a sequence containing both regulatory and/or intronic and/or exon sequences. The size ofthe nucleotide sequences (a) and (c) ranges from 1 to 50 kb, preferably from 1 to 10 kb, more preferably from 2 to 6 kb and most preferably from 2 to 4 kb. DNA Constructs Allowing Homologous Recombination: Cre-LoxP System These new DNA constructs make use of the site specific recombination system of the PI phage. The PI phage possesses a recombinase called Cre which interacts specifically with a 34 base pairs loxP site. The lox? site is composed of two palmdromic sequences of 13 bp separated by a 8 bp conserved sequence (Hoess et al , 1986). The recombination by the Cre enzyme between two lox? sites having an identical onentation leads to the deletion ofthe DNA fragment. The Cre-lox? system used in combination with a homologous recombination technique has been first descπbed by Gu et α/.(1993, 1994). Bπefly, a nucleotide sequence of interest to be inserted in a targeted location ofthe genome harbors at least two loxP sites in the same orientation and located at the respective ends of a nucleotide sequence to be excised from the recombinant genome. The excision event requires the presence of the recombinase (Cre) enzyme withm the nucleus ofthe recombinant cell host. The recombinase enzyme may be provided at the desired time either by (a) incubating the recombinant cell hosts in a culture medium containing this enzyme, by injecting the Cre enzyme directly into the desired cell, such as descnbed by Araki et al (1995), or by hpofection ofthe enzyme into the cells, such as descnbed by Bauboms et al (1993); (b) transfecting the cell host with a vector comprising the Cre coding sequence operably linked to a promoter functional in the recombinant host cell, said promoter being optionally inducible, said vector being introduced in the recombinant cell host, such as described by Gu et al (1993) and Sauer et al (1988); (c) introducing in the genome of the cell host a polynucleotide compπsing the Cre coding sequence operably linked to a promoter functional in the recombinant cell host, which promoter is optionally inducible, and said polynucleotide being inserted in the genome of the cell host either by a random insertion event or an homologous recombination event, such as described by Gu et α/ (1994). In a specific embodiment, the vector containing the sequence to be inserted in the PG-3 gene by homologous recombination is constructed in such a way that selectable markers are flanked by lox? sites ofthe same orientation, it is possible, by treatment by the Cre enzyme, to eliminate the selectable markers while leaving the PG-3 sequences of interest that have been inserted by an homologous recombination event. Again, two selectable markers are needed: a positive selection marker to select for the recombination event and a negative selection marker to select for the homologous recombination event. Vectors and methods using the Cre-/αxP system are descπbed by Zou et α/.(1994). Thus, a third preferred DNA construct ofthe invention comprises, from 5 '-end to 3 '-end: (a) a first nucleotide sequence that is included in the PG-3 genomic sequence; (b) a nucleotide sequence compπsing a polynucleotide encoding a positive selection marker, said nucleotide sequence comprising additionally two sequences defining a site recognized by a recombinase, such as a lox? site, the two sites being placed m the same oπentation; and (c) a second nucleotide sequence that is included m the PG-3 genomic sequence, and is located on the genome downstream ofthe first PG-3 nucleotide sequence (a). The sequences defining a site recognized by a recombinase, such as a lox? site, are preferably located within the nucleotide sequence (b) at suitable locations bordenng the nucleotide sequence for which the conditional excision is sought. In one specific embodiment, two lox? sites are located at each side of the positive selection marker sequence, in order to allow its excision at a desired time after the occurrence ofthe homologous recombination event. In a preferred embodiment of a method using the third DNA construct descnbed above, the excision ofthe polynucleotide fragment bordered by the two sites recognized by a recombinase, preferably two loxP sites, is performed at a desired time, due to the presence withm the genome of the recombinant host cell of a sequence encoding the Cre enzyme operably linked to a promoter sequence, preferably an inducible promoter, more preferably a tissue-specific promoter sequence and most preferably a promoter sequence which is both inducible and tissue-specific, such as described by Gu et α/.(1994). The presence of the Cre enzyme within the genome of the recombinant cell host may result from the breeding of two transgenic animals, the first transgenic animal bearing the PG-3-derived sequence of interest containing the lox? sites as described above and the second transgenic animal bearing the Cre coding sequence operably linked to a suitable promoter sequence, such as described by Gu et α/.(1994). Spatio-temporal control ofthe Cre enzyme expression may also be achieved with an adeno virus based vector that contains the Cre gene thus allowing infection of cells, or in vivo infection of organs, for delivery ofthe Cre enzyme, such as described by Anton et al. (1995) and Kanegae et α/.(1995). The DNA constructs described above may be used to introduce a desired nucleotide sequence of the invention, preferably a PG-3 genomic sequence or a PG-3 cDNA sequence, and most preferably an altered copy of a PG-3 genomic or cDNA sequence, within a predetermined location ofthe targeted genome, leading either to the generation of an altered copy of a targeted gene (knock-out homologous recombination) or to the replacement of a copy ofthe targeted gene by another copy sufficiently homologous to allow an homologous recombination event to occur (knock-in homologous recombination). In a specific embodiment, the DNA constructs described above may be used to introduce a PG-3 genomic sequence or a PG-3 cDNA sequence comprising at least one biallelic marker of the present invention, preferably at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A80. Nuclear Antisense DNA Constructs Other compositions comprise a vector of the invention comprising an oligonucleotide fragment of the nucleic acid sequence of SEQ ID No 2, preferably a fragment including the start codon of the PG-3 gene, as an antisense tool that inhibits the expression ofthe corresponding PG-3 gene. Preferred methods using antisense polynucleotide according to the present invention are the procedures described by Sczakiel et α/.(1995) or those described in PCT Application No WO 95/24223. Preferably, the antisense tools are chosen among the polynucleotides (15-200 bp long) that are complementary to the 5'end ofthe PG-3 mRNA. In one embodiment, a combination of different antisense polynucleotides complementary to different parts ofthe desired targeted gene are used. Preferred antisense polynucleotides according to the present invention are complementary to a sequence ofthe mRNAs of PG-3 that contains either the translation initiation codon ATG or a splicing site. Further preferred antisense polynucleotides according to the invention are complementary of the splicing site ofthe PG-3 mRNA. Preferably, the antisense polynucleotides ofthe invention have a 3' polyadenylation signal that has been replaced with a self-cleaving ribozyme sequence, such that RNA polymerase II transcripts are produced without poly(A) at their 3' ends, these antisense polynucleotides being incapable of export from the nucleus, such as described by Liu et a/. (1994). In a preferred embodiment, these PG-3 antisense polynucleotides also comprise, within the πbozyme cassette, a histone stem-loop structure to stabilize cleaved transcπpts against 3 '-5' exonucleolytic degradation, such as the structure described by Eckner et al (1991). Oligonucleotide Probes And Primers Polynucleotides denved from the PG-3 gene are useful in order to detect the presence of at least a copy of a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 1 , or a fragment, complement, or vanant thereof in a test sample. Particularly preferred probes and primers of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1: 1-97921, 98517-103471, 103603-108222, 108390-109221, 109324- 114409, 114538-115723, 115957-122102, 122225-126876, 127033-157212, 157808-240825. Additional preferred probes and pnmers of the invention include isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1 : 1-10000, 10001-20000, 20001-30000, 30001-40000, 40001-50000, 50001-60000, 60001-70000, 70001-80000, 80001-90000, 90001-97921, 98517-103471, 103603- 108222, 108390-109221, 109324-114409, 114538-1 15723, 115957-122102, 122225-126876, 127033-157212, 157808-159000, 159001-160000, 160001-170000, 170001-180000, 180001- 190000, 190001-200000, 200001-210000, 210001-220000, 220001-230000, 230001-240825. Another object ofthe invention is a punfied, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid comprising the nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID No 2, complementary sequences thereto, as well as allelic vanants, and fragments thereof. Moreover, preferred probes and primers ofthe invention include punfied, isolated, or recombinant PG-3 cDNAs consisting of, consisting essentially of, or compnsing the sequence of SEQ ID No 2. Particularly preferred probes and primers of the invention include isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof. Additional preferred embodiments ofthe invention include probes and primers compπsing a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span compπses at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 2. 1-500, 501-1000, 1001-1500, 1501-2000, 2001-2500, 2501-3000, 3001- 3500, 3501-3809. Thus, the invention also relates to nucleic acid probes charactenzed in that they hybridize specifically, under the stnngent hybridization conditions defined above, with a nucleic acid selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide sequences 1-97921, 98517-103471, 103603-108222, 108390-109221, 109324-114409, 114538-115723, 115957-122102, 122225-126876, 127033- 157212, 157808-240825 of SEQ ID No 1 or a variant thereof or a sequence complementary thereto. The invention relates to nucleic acid probes characterized in that they hybridize specifically, under the stnngent hybridization conditions defined above, with a nucleic acid of SEQ ID No 2 or a variant or a fragment thereof or a sequence complementary thereto. In one embodiment the invention encompasses isolated, purified, and recombinant polynucleotides consisting of, or consisting essentially of a contiguous span of at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, or 50 nucleotides in length of any one of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2 and the complement thereof, wherein said span includes a PG-3 -related biallelic marker in said sequence; optionally, said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequihbnum therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A5 and A8 to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A6 and A7, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, said contiguous span is 18 to 35 nucleotides in length and said biallelic marker is withm 4 nucleotides of the center of said polynucleotide; optionally, said polynucleotide comprises, consists essentially of, or consists of said contiguous span and said contiguous span is 25 nucleotides in length and said biallelic marker is at the center of said polynucleotide; optionally, the 3' end of said contiguous span is present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide; and optionally, the 3' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3' end of said polynucleotide and said biallelic marker is present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. In a preferred embodiment, said probes compπses, consists of, or consists essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences: PI to P4 and P6 to P80 and the complementary sequences thereto. In another embodiment the invention encompasses isolated, punfied or recombinant polynucleotides comprising, consisting of, or consisting essentially of a contiguous span of at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, or 50 nucleotides in length of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2, or the complements thereof, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3' end of said polynucleotide, and wherein the 3' end of said polynucleotide is located withm 20 nucleotides upstream of a PG-3-related biallelic marker in said sequence; optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said PG- 3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A5 and A8 to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A6 and A7, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein the 3' end of said polynucleotide is located 1 nucleotide upstream of said PG-3-related biallelic marker in said sequence; and optionally, wherein said polynucleotide consists essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences: Dl to D4, D6 to D80, El to E4 and E6 to E80. In a further embodiment, the invention encompasses isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotides comprising, consisting of, or consisting essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences: Bl to B52 and Cl to C52. In an additional embodiment, the invention encompasses polynucleotides for use in hybridization assays, sequencing assays, and enzyme-based mismatch detection assays for determining the identity of the nucleotide at a PG-3 -related biallelic marker in SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2, as well as polynucleotides for use in amplifying segments of nucleotides comprising a PG-3-related biallelic marker in SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2; optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A5 and A8 to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A6 and A7, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith. The invention concerns the use ofthe polynucleotides according to the invention for determining the identity of the nucleotide at a PG-3-related biallelic marker, preferably in hybridization assay, sequencing assay, microsequencing assay, or an enzyme-based mismatch detection assay and in amplifying segments of nucleotides comprising a PG-3 -related biallelic marker. A probe or a primer according to the invention is between 8 and 1000 nucleotides in length, or is specified to be at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500 or 1000 nucleotides in length. More particularly, the length of these probes and primers can range from 8, 10, 15, 20, or 30 to 100 nucleotides, preferably from 10 to 50, more preferably from 15 to 30 nucleotides. Shorter probes and primers tend to lack specificity for a target nucleic acid sequence and generally require cooler temperatures to form sufficiently stable hybrid complexes with the template. Longer probes and primers are expensive to produce and can sometimes self-hybridize to form haiφin structures. The appropriate length for primers and probes under a particular set of assay conditions may be empirically determined by one of skill in the art. A preferred probe or primer consists of a nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide selected from the group ofthe nucleotide sequences of PI to P4 and P6 to P80 and the complementary sequence thereto, Bl to B52, Cl to C52, Dl to D4, D6 to D80, El to E4 and E6 to E80, for which the respective locations in the sequence listing are provided in Tables 1, 2, and 3. The formation of stable hybrids depends on the melting temperature (Tm) ofthe DNA. The Tm depends on the length of the primer or probe, the ionic strength of the solution and the G+C content. The higher the G+C content ofthe primer or probe, the higher is the melting temperature because G:C pairs are held by three H bonds whereas A:T pairs have only two. The GC content in the probes ofthe invention usually ranges between 10 and 75 %, preferably between 35 and 60 %, and more preferably between 40 and 55 %. The primers and probes can be prepared by any suitable method, including, for example, cloning and restriction of appropriate sequences and direct chemical synthesis by a method such as the phosphodiester method of Narang et α/.(1979), the phosphodiester method of Brown et α/.(1979), the diethylphosphoramidite method of Beaucage et α/.(1981) and the solid support method described in EP 0 707 592. Detection probes are generally nucleic acid sequences or uncharged nucleic acid analogs such as, for example peptide nucleic acids which are disclosed in International Patent Application WO 92/20702, moφholino analogs which are described in U.S. Patents Numbered 5,185,444; 5,034,506 and 5,142,047. The probe may have to be rendered "non-extendable" in that additional dNTPs cannot be added to the probe. In and of themselves analogs usually are non-extendable and nucleic acid probes can be rendered non-extendable by modifying the 3' end ofthe probe such that the hydroxyl group is no longer capable of participating in elongation. For example, the 3' end of the probe can be functionalized with the capture or detection label to thereby consume or otherwise block the hydroxyl group. Alternatively, the 3' hydroxyl group simply can be cleaved, replaced or modified, U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 07/049,061 filed April 19, 1993 describes modifications, which can be used to render a probe non-extendable. Any of the polynucleotides of the present invention can be labeled, if desired, by incoφorating any label known in the art to be detectable by spectroscopic, photochemical, biochemical, immunochemical, or chemical means. For example, useful labels include radioactive substances (including, P, S, H, I), fluorescent dyes (including, 5-bromodesoxyuridin, fluorescein, acetylaminofluorene, digoxigenin) or biotin. Preferably, polynucleotides are labeled at their 3' and 5' ends. Examples of non-radioactive labeling of nucleic acid fragments are described in the French patent No. FR-7810975, or by Urdea et al (1988) or Sanchez-Pescador et al (1988). In addition, the probes according to the present invention may have structural characteristics such that they allow the signal amplification, such structural characteristics being, for example, branched DNA probes as those described by Urdea et al in 1991 or in the European patent No. EP 0 225 807 (Chiron). A label can also be used to capture the primer, so as to facilitate the immobilization of either the pnmer or a primer extension product, such as amplified DNA, on a solid support. A capture label is attached to the pπmers or probes and can be a specific binding member which forms a binding pair with the solid's phase reagent's specific binding member (e.g. biotin and sfreptavidm). Therefore depending upon the type of label earned by a polynucleotide or a probe, it may be employed to capture or to detect the target DNA. Further, it will be understood that the polynucleotides, pnmers or probes provided herein, may, themselves, serve as the capture label. For example, in the case where a solid phase reagent's binding member is a nucleic acid sequence, it may be selected such that it binds a complementary portion of a primer or probe to thereby immobilize the pnmer or probe to the solid phase. In cases where a polynucleotide probe itself serves as the binding member, those skilled in the art will recognize that the probe will contain a sequence or "tail" that is not complementary to the target. In the case where a polynucleotide primer itself serves as the capture label, at least a portion ofthe primer will be free to hybridize with a nucleic acid on a solid phase. DNA Labeling techniques are well known to the skilled technician. The probes ofthe present invention are useful for a number of puφoses. They can be notably used in Southern hybridization to genomic DNA. The probes can also be used to detect PCR amplification products. They may also be used to detect mismatches in the PG-3 gene or mRNA using other techniques. Any of the polynucleotides, pnmers and probes of the present invention can be conveniently immobilized on a solid support. Solid supports are known to those skilled in the art and include the walls of wells of a reaction tray, test tubes, polystyrene beads, magnetic beads, nitrocellulose stnps, membranes, microparticles such as latex particles, sheep (or other animal) red blood cells, duracytes and others. The solid support is not cπtical and can be selected by one skilled in the art. Thus, latex particles, microparticles, magnetic or non-magnetic beads, membranes, plastic tubes, walls of microtiter wells, glass or silicon chips, sheep (or other suitable animal's) red blood cells and duracytes are all suitable examples Suitable methods for immobilizing nucleic acids on solid phases include ionic, hydrophobic, covalent interactions and the like. A solid support, as used herein, refers to any matenal which is insoluble, or can be made insoluble by a subsequent reaction. The solid support can be chosen for its intrinsic ability to attract and immobilize the capture reagent. Alternatively, the solid phase can retain an additional receptor which has the ability to attract and immobilize the capture reagent. The additional receptor can include a charged substance that is oppositely charged with respect to the capture reagent itself or to a charged substance conjugated to the capture reagent. As yet another alternative, the receptor molecule can be any specific binding member which is immobilized upon (attached to) the solid support and which has the ability to immobilize the capture reagent through a specific binding reaction. The receptor molecule enables the indirect binding ofthe capture reagent to a solid support matenal before the performance ofthe assay or during the performance of the assay. The solid phase thus can be a plastic, denvatized plastic, magnetic or non-magnetic metal, glass or silicon surface of a test tube, microtiter well, sheet, bead, microparticle, chip, sheep (or other suitable animal's) red blood cells, duracytes® and other configurations known to those of ordinary skill in the art. The polynucleotides of the invention can be attached to or immobilized on a solid support individually or in groups of at least 2, 5, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 25 distinct polynucleotides of the invention to a single solid support. In addition, polynucleotides other than those of the invention may be attached to the same solid support as one or more polynucleotides of the invention. Consequently, the invention also relates to a method for detecting the presence of a nucleic acid comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2, a fragment or a variant thereof and a complementary sequence thereto in a sample, said method comprising the following steps of: a) bπnging into contact a nucleic acid probe or a plurality of nucleic acid probes which can hybridize with a nucleotide sequence included in a nucleic acid selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2, a fragment or a variant thereof and a complementary sequence thereto and the sample to be assayed; and b) detecting the hybπd complex formed between the probe and a nucleic acid in the sample. The invention further concerns a kit for detecting the presence of a nucleic acid comprising a nucleotide sequence selected from a group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2, a fragment or a vanant thereof and a complementary sequence thereto in a sample, said kit comprising: a) a nucleic acid probe or a plurality of nucleic acid probes which can hybπdize with a nucleotide sequence included in a nucleic acid selected form the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2, a fragment or a vanant thereof and a complementary sequence thereto; and b) optionally, the reagents necessary for performing the hybndization reaction. In a first preferred embodiment of this detection method and kit, said nucleic acid probe or the plurality of nucleic acid probes are labeled with a detectable molecule. In a second preferred embodiment of said method and kit, said nucleic acid probe or the plurality of nucleic acid probes has been immobilized on a substrate. In a third preferred embodiment, the nucleic acid probe or the plurality of nucleic acid probes compπse either a sequence which is selected from the group consisting ofthe nucleotide sequences of PI to P4 and P6 to P80 and the complementary sequence thereto, Bl to B52, Cl to C52, Dl to D4, D6 to D80, El to E4 and E6 to E80 or a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A80 and the complements thereto. Oligonucleotide Arrays A substrate comprising a plurality of oligonucleotide primers or probes ofthe invention may be used either for detecting or amplifying targeted sequences in the PG-3 gene and may also be used for detecting mutations in the coding or in the non-coding sequences ofthe PG-3 gene. Any polynucleotide provided herein may be attached in overlapping areas or at random locations on the solid support. Alternatively, the polynucleotides of the invention may be attached in an ordered array wherein each polynucleotide is attached to a distinct region ofthe solid support which does not overlap with the attachment site of any other polynucleotide. Preferably, such an ordered array of polynucleotides is designed to be "addressable" where the distinct locations are recorded and can be accessed as part of an assay procedure. Addressable polynucleotide arrays typically comprise a plurality of different oligonucleotide probes that are coupled to a surface of a substrate in different known locations. The knowledge ofthe precise location of each polynucleotide makes these "addressable" arrays particularly useful in hybridization assays. Any addressable array technology known in the art can be employed with the polynucleotides ofthe invention. One particular embodiment of these polynucleotide arrays is known as the Genechips™, and has been generally descπbed in US Patent 5,143,854; PCT publications WO 90/15070 and 92/10092. These arrays may generally be produced using mechanical synthesis methods or light directed synthesis methods which mcoφorate a combination of photolithographic methods and solid phase oligonucleotide synthesis (Fodor et al , 1991). The immobilization of arrays of oligonucleotides on solid supports has been rendered possible by the development of a technology generally identified as "Very Large Scale Immobilized Polymer Synthesis" (VLSIPS™) in which, typically, probes are immobilized in a high density array on a solid surface of a chip. Examples of VLSIPS™ technologies are provided in US Patents 5,143,854; and 5,412,087 and in PCT Publications WO 90/15070, WO 92/10092 and WO 95/11995, which describe methods for forming oligonucleotide arrays through techniques such as light-directed synthesis techniques. In designing strategies aimed at providing arrays of nucleotides immobilized on solid supports, further presentation strategies were developed to order and display the oligonucleotide arrays on the chips in an attempt to maximize hybridization patterns and sequence information. Examples of such presentation strategies are disclosed in PCT Publications WO 94/12305, WO 94/11530, WO 97/29212 and WO 97/31256. In another embodiment ofthe oligonucleotide arrays ofthe invention, an oligonucleotide probe matnx may advantageously be used to detect mutations occurnng in the PG-3 gene and preferably in its regulatory region. For this particular puφose, probes are specifically designed to have a nucleotide sequence allowing their hybridization to the genes that carry known mutations (either by deletion, insertion or substitution of one or several nucleotides). By known mutations, it is meant, mutations on the PG-3 gene that have been identified according, for example to the technique used by Huang et al (1996) or Samson et αt.(1996). Another technique that may be used to detect mutations in the PG-3 gene is the use of a high-density DNA array. Each oligonucleotide probe constituting a unit element ofthe high density DNA array is designed to match a specific subsequence of the PG-3 genomic DNA or cDNA. Thus, an array consisting of oligonucleotides complementary to subsequences ofthe target gene sequence is used to determine the identity of the target sequence within a sample, measure its amount, and detect differences between the target sequence and the sequence of the PG-3 gene in the sample. In one such design, termed 4L tiled array, a set of four probes (A, C, G, T), preferably 15-nucleotide oligomers, is used. In each set of four probes, the perfect complement will hybridize more strongly than mismatched probes. Consequently, a nucleic acid target of length L is scanned for mutations with a tiled array containing 4L probes, the whole probe set containing all the possible mutations in the known sequence. The hybridization signals of the 15-mer probe set tiled array are perturbed by a single base change in the target sequence. As a consequence, there is a characteristic loss of signal or a "footprint" for the probes flanking a mutation position. This technique was described by Chee et al. in 1996. Consequently, the invention concerns an array of nucleic acid molecules comprising at least one polynucleotide described above as probes and primers. Preferably, the invention concerns an array of nucleic acid comprising at least two polynucleotides described above as probes and primers. A further object ofthe invention consists of an array of nucleic acid sequences comprising either at least one of the sequences selected from the group consisting of PI to P4 and P6 to P80, Bl to B52, Cl to C52, Dl to D4, D6 to D80, El to E4 and E6 to E80, the sequences complementary thereto, a fragment thereof of at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, or 20 consecutive nucleotides thereof, or at least one sequence comprising a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A80 and the complements thereto. The invention also pertains to an array of nucleic acid sequences comprising either at least two ofthe sequences selected from the group consisting of PI to P4, P6 to P80, Bl to B52, Cl to C52, Dl to D4, D6 to D80, El to E4 and E6 to E80, the sequences complementary thereto, a fragment thereof of at least 8 consecutive nucleotides thereof, or at least two sequences comprising a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A80 and the complements thereof. PG-3 PROTEINS AND POLYPEPTIDE FRAGMENTS The term "PG-3 polypeptides" is used herein to embrace all ofthe proteins and polypeptides ofthe present invention. Also forming part ofthe invention are polypeptides encoded by the polynucleotides ofthe invention, as well as fusion polypeptides comprising such polypeptides. The invention embodies PG-3 proteins from humans, including isolated or purified PG-3 proteins consisting, consisting essentially, or comprising the sequence of SEQ ID No 3. More particularly, the present invention concerns allelic variants of the PG-3 protein comprising at least one amino acid selected from the group consisting of an arginine or an isoleucine residue at the amino acid position 304 of the SEQ ID No 3, a histidine or an aspartic acid residue at the ammo acid position 314 of the SEQ ID No 3, a threonme or an asparagine residue at the ammo acid position 682 of the SEQ ID No 3, an alanine or a vahne residue at the amino acid position 761 of the SEQ ID No 3, and a prohne or a seπne residue at the amino acid position 828 ofthe SEQ ID No 3. In adddition, the invention also encompasses polypeptide vanants of PG-3 comprising at least one amino acid selected from the group consisting of a methionine or an isoleucine residue at the position 91 of SEQ ID No 3, a vahne or an alanine residue at the position 306 of SEQ ID No 3, a prohne or a serine residue at the position 413 of SEQ ID No 3, a glycine or an aspartate residue at the position 528 of SEQ ID No 3, a vahne or an alanine residue at the position 614 of SEQ ID No 3, a threonme or an asparagine residue at the position 677 of SEQ ID No 3, a vahne or an alanine residue at the position 756 of SEQ ID No 3, a vahne or an alanine residue at the position 758 of SEQ ID No 3, a lysine or a glutamate residue at the position 809 of SEQ ID No 3, and a cysteine or an argmine residue at the position 821 of SEQ ID No 3. The present invention includes isolated, punfied, or recombinant polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 ammo acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3. The present invention also embodies isolated, punfied, and recombinant polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 ammo acids of SEQ ID No 3, wherein said contiguous span includes at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the following amino acid positions of SEQ ID No 3 : 1 - 100, 101 -200, 201 -300, 301 -400, 401-500, 501-600, 601-700, 701-835. In other preferred embodiments the contiguous stretch of amino acids comprises the site of a mutation or functional mutation, including a deletion, addition, swap or truncation of the amino acids in the PG-3 protein sequence. The invention also encompasses punfied, isolated, or recombinant polypeptides comprising a sequence having at least 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 98 or 99% nucleotide identity with the sequence of SEQ ID No 3 or a fragment thereof. PG-3 proteins are preferably isolated from human or mammalian tissue samples or expressed from human or mammalian genes. The PG-3 polypeptides ofthe invention can be made using routine expression methods known in the art. The polynucleotide encoding the desired polypeptide, is ligated into an expression vector suitable for any convenient host. Both eukaryotic and prokaryotic host systems is used m forming recombinant polypeptides, and a summary of some ofthe more common systems. The polypeptide is then isolated from lysed cells or from the culture medium and purified to the extent needed for its intended use. Punfication is by any technique known in the art, for example, differential extraction, salt fractionation, chromatography, centπfugation, and the like. See, for example, Methods in Enzymology for a variety of methods for purifying proteins. In addition, shorter protein fragments is produced by chemical synthesis. Alternatively the proteins ofthe invention is extracted from cells or tissues of humans or non-human animals. Methods for puπfying proteins are known in the art, and include the use of detergents or chaotropic agents to disrupt particles followed by differential extraction and separation ofthe polypeptides by ion exchange chromatography, affinity chromatography, sedimentation according to density, and gel electrophoresis. Any PG-3 cDNA, including SEQ ID No 2, may be used to express PG-3 proteins and polypeptides. The nucleic acid encodmg the PG-3 protein or polypeptide to be expressed is operably linked to a promoter m an expression vector using conventional cloning technology. The PG-3 insert in the expression vector may compnse the full coding sequence for the PG-3 protein or a portion thereof. For example, the PG-3 denved insert may encode a polypeptide compπsing at least 10 consecutive ammo acids ofthe PG-3 protein of SEQ ID No 3, preferably least 10 consecutive ammo acids including at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the following amino acid positions of SEQ ID No 3: 1-100, 101- 200, 201-300, 301-400, 401-500, 501-600, 601-700, 701-835. The expression vector may be any ofthe mammalian, yeast, insect or bactenal expression systems known in the art. Commercially available vectors and expression systems are available from a vanety of suppliers including Genetics Institute (Cambndge, MA), Stratagene (La Jolla, California), Promega (Madison, Wisconsin), and Invitrogen (San Diego, California). If desired, to enhance expression and facilitate proper protein folding, the codon context and codon pa nng ofthe sequence may be optimized for the particular expression organism in which the expression vector is introduced, as explained by Hatfield, et al , and U.S. Patent No. 5,082,767. In one embodiment, the entire coding sequence ofthe PG-3 cDNA through the poly A signal ofthe cDNA is operably lmked to a promoter in the expression vector. Alternatively, if the nucleic acid encoding a portion ofthe PG-3 protein lacks a methionine to serve as the initiation site, an initiating methionine can be introduced next to the first codon ofthe nucleic acid using conventional techniques. Similarly, if the insert from the PG-3 cDNA lacks a poly A signal, this sequence can be added to the construct by, for example, splicing out the Poly A signal from pSG5 (Stratagene) using Bgll and Sail restnction endonuclease enzymes and incoφorating it into the mammalian expression vector pXTl (Stratagene). pXTl contains the LTRs and a portion ofthe gag gene from Moloney Munne Leukemia Virus. The position ofthe LTRs in the construct allow efficient stable transfection. The vector includes the Heφes Simplex Thymidine Kinase promoter and the selectable neomycin gene. The nucleic acid encodmg the PG-3 protein or a portion thereof is obtained by PCR from a bactenal vector containing the PG-3 cDNA of SEQ ID No 3 using oligonucleotide pnmers complementary to the PG-3 cDNA or portion thereof and containing restnction endonuclease sequences for Pst I incoφorated into the 5 'pnmer and Bgiπ at the 5' end ofthe corresponding cDNA 3' pnmer, taking care to ensure that the sequence encoding the PG-3 protein or a portion thereof is positioned properly with respect to the poly A signal. The punfied fragment obtained from the resulting PCR reaction is digested with Pstl, blunt ended with an exonuclease, digested with Bgl π, punfied and ligated to pXTl, now containing a poly A signal and digested with Bgiπ. The ligated product is transfected into mouse NIH 3T3 cells using Lipofectm (Life Technologies, Inc., Grand Island, New York) under conditions outlined in the product specification. Positive transfectants are selected after growing the transfected cells m 600ug/ml G418 (Sigma, St. Louis, Missoun). The above procedures may also be used to express a mutant PG-3 protein responsible for a detectable phenotype or a portion thereof. The expressed protein is punfied using conventional punfication techniques such as ammonium sulfate precipitation or chromatographic separation based on size or charge. The protein encoded by the nucleic acid insert may also be punfied using standard immunochromatography techniques. In such procedures, a solution containing the expressed PG-3 protein or portion thereof, such as a cell extract, is applied to a column having antibodies against the PG-3 protein or portion thereof attached to the chromatography matnx. The expressed protein is allowed to bind the immunochromatography column. Thereafter, the column is washed to remove non-specifically bound proteins The specifically bound expressed protein is then released from the column and recovered using standard techniques. To confirm expression ofthe PG-3 protein or a portion thereof, the proteins expressed from host cells containing an expression vector containing an insert encoding the PG-3 protein or a portion thereof can be compared to the proteins expressed m host cells containing the expression vector without an insert. The presence of a band in samples from cells containing the expression vector with an insert which is absent in samples from cells containing the expression vector without an insert indicates that the PG-3 protein or a portion thereof is being expressed. Generally, the band will have the mobility expected for the PG-3 protein or portion thereof. However, the band may have a mobility different than that expected as a result of modifications such as glycosylation, ubiquitination, or enzymatic cleavage. Antibodies capable of specifically recognizing the expressed PG-3 protein or a portion thereof are descnbed below. If antibody production is not possible, the nucleic acids encoding the PG-3 protein or a portion thereof is incoφorated into expression vectors designed for use in punfication schemes employing chimenc polypeptides. In such strategies the nucleic acid encoding the PG-3 protein or a portion thereof is inserted in frame with the gene encoding the other half of the chimera. The other half of the chimera is β-globin or a nickel binding polypeptide encoding sequence. A chromatography matnx having antibody to β-globin or nickel attached thereto is then used to punfy the chimenc protein. Protease cleavage sites are engineered between the β-globm gene or the nickel binding polypeptide and the PG-3 protein or portion thereof. Thus, the two polypeptides ofthe chimera is separated from one another by protease digestion. One useful expression vector for generating β-globin chimenc proteins is pSG5 (Stratagene), which encodes rabbit β-globin. Intron II ofthe rabbit β-globm gene facilitates splicing ofthe expressed transcnpt, and the polyadenylation signal incoφorated into the construct increases the level of expression. These techniques are well known to those skilled in the art of molecular biology. Standard methods are published in methods texts such as Davis et al , (1986) and many ofthe methods are available from Stratagene, Life Technologies, Inc., or Promega. Polypeptide may additionally be produced from the construct using in vitro translation systems such as the In vitro Express™ Translation Kit (Stratagene). ANTIBODIES THAT BIND PG-3 POLYPEPTIDES OF THE INVENTION Any PG-3 polypeptide or whole protein may be used to generate antibodies capable of specifically binding to an expressed PG-3 protein or fragments thereof as descnbed. One antibody composition ofthe invention is capable of specifically binding to the PG-3 protein of SEQ ID No 3. For an antibody composition to specifically bind to the PG-3 protein, it must demonstrate at least a 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 50%, or 100% greater binding affinity for PG-3 protein than for another protein in an ELISA, RIA, or other antibody-based binding assay. The invention also concerns antibody compositions which are specific for variants ofthe PG-3 protein, more particuarly variants comprising at least one amino acid selected from the group consisting of a methionine or an isoleucine residue at the position 91 of SEQ ID No 3, a vahne or an alanine residue at the position 306 of SEQ ID No 3, a prohne or a senne residue at the position 413 of SEQ ID No 3, a glycine or an aspartate residue at the position 528 of SEQ ID No 3, a vahne or an alanine residue at the position 614 of SEQ ID No 3, a threonme or an asparagine residue at the position 677 of SEQ ID No 3, a vahne or an alanine residue at the position 756 of SEQ ID No 3, a vahne or an alanine residue at the position 758 of SEQ ID No 3, a lysine or a glutamate residue at the position 809 of SEQ ID No 3, and a cysteme or an argmine residue at the position 821 of SEQ ID No 3. More preferably, the invention encompasses antibody compositions which are specific for an allelic variant ofthe PG-3 protein, more particuarly a variant comprising at least one ammo acid selected from the group consisting of an arginine or an isoleucine residue at the amino acid position 304 of SEQ ID No 3, a histidine or an aspartic acid residue at the ammo acid position 314 of SEQ ID No 3, a threonme or an asparagine residue at the ammo acid position 682 of SEQ ID No 3, an alanme or a vahne residue at the ammo acid position 761 of SEQ ID No 3, and a prohne or a senne residue at the ammo acid position 828 of SEQ ID No 3. In a preferred embodiment, the invention concerns antibody compositions, either polyclonal or monoclonal, capable of selectively binding, or selectively bind to an epitope-containmg a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 ammo acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3; preferably, said epitope comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 ofthe following ammo acid positions of SEQ ID No 3: 1-100, 101-200, 201-300, 301-400, 401-500, 501-600, 601-700, 701-835. The invention also concerns a punfied or isolated antibody capable of specifically binding to a mutated PG-3 protein or to a fragment or variant thereof comprising an epitope of the mutated PG-3 protein. In another preferred embodiment, the present invention concerns an antibody capable of binding to a polypeptide comprising at least 10 consecutive amino acids of a PG-3 protein and including at least one of the ammo acids which can be encoded by the trait causing mutations. In a preferred embodiment, the invention concerns the use in the manufacture of antibodies of a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3; preferably, said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 of the following ammo acid positions of SEQ ID No 3: 1-100, 101-200, 201-300, 301-400, 401-500, 501-600, 601-700, 701- 835. Non-human animals or mammals, whether wild-type or transgenic, which express a different species of PG-3 than the one to which antibody binding is desired, and animals which do not express PG-3 (i e. a PG-3 knock out animal as descnbed herein) are particularly useful for preparing antibodies. PG-3 knock out animals will recognize all or most of the exposed regions of a PG-3 protein as foreign antigens, and therefore produce antibodies with a wider array of PG-3 epitopes. Moreover, smaller polypeptides with only 10 to 30 amino acids may be useful in obtaining specific binding to any one of the PG-3 proteins. In addition, the humoral immune system of animals which produce a species of PG-3 that resembles the antigenic sequence will preferentially recognize the differences between the animal's native PG-3 species and the antigen sequence, and produce antibodies to these unique sites in the antigen sequence. Such a technique will be particularly useful in obtaining antibodies that specifically bind to any one of the PG-3 proteins. Antibody preparations prepared according to either protocol are useful in quantitative immunoassays which determine concentrations of antigen-beaπng substances in biological samples; they are also used semi-quantitatively or qualitatively to identify the presence of antigen in a biological sample. The antibodies may also be used in therapeutic compositions for killing cells expressing the protein or reducing the levels ofthe protein in the body. The antibodies ofthe invention may be labeled using any one ofthe radioactive, fluorescent or enzymatic labels known in the art. Consequently, the invention is also directed to a method for specifically detecting the presence of a PG-3 polypeptide according to the invention m a biological sample, said method comprising the following steps : a) bπnging the biological sample into contact with a polyclonal or monoclonal antibody that specifically binds to a PG-3 polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence of SEQ ID No 3, or to a peptide fragment or variant thereof; and b) detecting the antigen-antibody complex formed The invention also concerns a diagnostic kit for detecting the presence of a PG-3 polypeptide according to the present invention in a biological sample in vitro , wherein said kit comprises: a) a polyclonal or monoclonal antibody that specifically binds to a PG-3 polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID No 3, or to a peptide fragment or variant thereof; optionally the antibody may be labeled, and b) a reagent allowing the detection of the antigen-antibody complexes formed, said reagent optionally carrying a label, or being able to be recognized itself by a labeled reagent (particularly in the case when the above-mentioned monoclonal or polyclonal antibody itself is not labeled). PG-3 -RELATED BIALLELIC MARKERS Advantages Of The Biallelic Markers Of The Present Invention The PG-3 -related biallelic markers of the present invention offer a number of important advantages over other genetic markers such as RFLP (Restriction fragment length polymoφhism) and VNTR (Vaπable Number of Tandem Repeats) markers. The first generation of markers were RFLPs, which are vanations that modify the length of a restriction fragment. But methods used to identify and to type RFLPs are relatively wasteful of materials, effort, and time The second generation of genetic markers were VNTRs, which can be categorized as either minisatelhtes or microsatelhtes. Minisatelhtes are tandemly repeated DNA sequences present m units of 5-50 repeats which are distributed along regions of the human chromosomes ranging from 0.1 to 20 kilobases in length. Since they present many possible alleles, their informative content is very high. Minisatelhtes are scored by performing Southern blots to identify the number of tandem repeats present in a nucleic acid sample from the individual being tested. However, there are only 10 4 potential VNTRs that can be typed by Southern blotting Moreover, both RFLP and VNTR markers are costly and time-consuming to develop and assay in large numbers. Single nucleotide polymoφhisms (SNPs) or biallelic markers can be used in the same manner as RFLPs and VNTRs but offer several advantages. SNPs are densely spaced in the human genome and represent the most frequent type of vanation. An estimated number of more than 10 sites are scattered along the 3xl0 9 base pairs ofthe human genome. Therefore, SNPs occur at a greater frequency and with greater uniformity than RFLP or VNTR markers which means that there is a greater probability that such a marker will be found in close proximity to a genetic locus of interest SNPs are less vanable than VNTR markers but are mutationally more stable. Also, the different forms of a characteπzed single nucleotide polymoφhism, such as the biallelic markers ofthe present invention, are often easier to distinguish and can therefore be typed easily on a routine basis. Biallelic markers have single nucleotide based alleles and they have only two common alleles, which allows highly parallel detection and automated sconng. The biallelic markers of the present invention offer the possibility of rapid, high throughput genotypmg of a large number of individuals. Biallelic markers are densely spaced in the genome, sufficiently informative and can be assayed in large numbers. The combined effects of these advantages make biallelic markers extremely valuable in genetic studies. Biallelic markers can be used in linkage studies in families, in allele sharing methods, in linkage disequihbπum studies in populations, in association studies of case-control populations or of trait positive and trait negative populations. An important aspect of the present invention is that biallelic markers allow association studies to be performed to identify genes involved in complex traits. Association studies examine the frequency of marker alleles in unrelated case- and control-populations and are generally employed in the detection of polygemc or sporadic traits. Association studies may be conducted withm the general population and are not limited to studies performed on related individuals in affected families (linkage studies). Biallelic markers in different genes can be screened in parallel for direct association with disease or response to a treatment. This multiple gene approach is a powerful tool for a variety of human genetic studies as it provides the necessary statistical power to examine the synergistic effect of multiple genetic factors on a particular phenotype, drug response, sporadic trait, or disease state with a complex genetic etiology. Candidate Gene Of The Present Invention Different approaches can be employed to perform association studies- genome-wide association studies, candidate region association studies and candidate gene association studies. Genome -wide association studies rely on the screening of genetic markers evenly spaced and covering the entire genome. The candidate gene approach is based on the study of genetic markers specifically located in genes potentially involved m a biological pathway related to the trait of interest In the present invention, PG-3 is a good candidate gene for cancer The candidate gene analysis clearly provides a short-cut approach to the identification of genes and gene polymoφhisms related to a particular trait when some information concerning the biology of the trait is available. However, it should be noted that all of the biallelic markers disclosed in the instant application can be employed as part of genome-wide association studies or as part of candidate region association studies and such uses are specifically contemplated in the present invention and claims. PG-3-Related Biallelic Markers And Polynucleotides Related Thereto The invention also concerns PG-3-related biallelic markers. As used herein the term "PG-3- related biallelic marker" relates to a set of biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium with the PG-3 gene. The term PG-3-related biallelic marker includes the biallelic markers designated Al to A80. A portion ofthe biallelic markers ofthe present invention are disclosed in Table 2. Their locations in the PG-3 gene are indicated in Table 2 and also as a single base polymoφhism in the features of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2 listed in the accompanying Sequence Listing. The pairs of pnmers allowing the amplification of a nucleic acid containing the polymoφhic base of one PG-3 biallelic marker are listed in Table 1 of Example 2. Eight PG-3-related biallelic markers A3, A6, A7, A14, A70, A71, A72 and A80, are located in the exonic regions of the genomic sequence of PG-3 at the following positions: 10228, 39944, 5 39973, 76060, 216026, 216082, 216218 and 237555 of the SEQ ID No 1. They are located in exons C, T, I, K and L of the PG-3 gene. Their respective positions in the cDNA and protein sequences are given in Table 2. The invention also relates to a purified and/or isolated nucleotide sequence comprising a polymoφhic base of a PG-3-related biallelic marker, preferably of a biallelic marker selected from 0 the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof. The sequence is between 8 and 1000 nucleotides in length, and preferably comprises at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500 or 1000 contiguous nucleotides of a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2 or a vanant thereof or a complementary sequence thereto. These nucleotide sequences comprise the polymoφhic base of either allele 1 or allele 2 ofthe 5 considered biallelic marker Optionally, said biallelic marker may be within 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 nucleotides of the center of said polynucleotide or at the center of said polynucleotide. Optionally, the 3' end of said contiguous span may be present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. Optionally, biallelic marker may be present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. Optionally, said polynucleotide may further compnse a label. Optionally, said polynucleotide can be attached to solid support In a 0 further embodiment, the polynucleotides defined above can be used alone or in any combination The invention also relates to a purified and or isolated nucleotide sequence comprising a sequence between 8 and 1000 nucleotides in length, and preferably at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 100, 250, 500 or 1000 contiguous nucleotides of a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2 or a variant thereof or a complementary 5 sequence thereto. Optionally, the 3' end of said polynucleotide may be located within or at least 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 50, 100, 250, 500, or 1000 nucleotides upstream of a PG-3-related biallelic marker in said sequence. Optionally, said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80; Optionally, the 3' end of said polynucleotide may be located 1 nucleotide upstream of a PG-3-related biallelic marker in said sequence. Optionally, said 0 polynucleotide may further comprise a label. Optionally, said polynucleotide can be attached to solid support. In a further embodiment, the polynucleotides defined above can be used alone or in any combination In a preferred embodiment, the sequences comprising a polymoφhic base of one of the biallelic markers listed in Table 2 are selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences 5 compπsing, consisting essentially of, or consisting of the amphcons listed in Table 1 or a variant thereof or a complementary sequence thereto. The invention further concerns a nucleic acid encodmg the PG-3 protein, wherein said nucleic acid comprises a polymoφhic base of a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A80 and the complements thereof. The invention also encompasses the use of any polynucleotide for, or any polynucleotide for use in, determining the identity of one or more nucleotides at a PG-3-related biallelic marker In addition, the polynucleotides of the invention for use in determining the identity of one or more nucleotides at a PG-3-related biallelic marker encompass polynucleotides with any further limitation descnbed in this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or m any combination. Optionally, said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbπum therewith; optionally, said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A5 and A8 to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbπum therewith; optionally, said PG-3 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting A6 and A7, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; Optionally, said polynucleotide may comprise a sequence disclosed in the present specification; Optionally, said polynucleotide may comprise, consist of, or consist essentially of any polynucleotide descnbed in the present specification; Optionally, said determining may involve a hybridization assay, sequencing assay, microsequencing assay, or an enzyme -based mismatch detection assay; Optionally, said polynucleotide may be attached to a solid support, array, or addressable array, Optionally, said polynucleotide may be labeled. A preferred polynucleotide may be used in a hybridization assay for determining the identity of the nucleotide at a PG-3 -related biallelic marker. Another preferred polynucleotide may be used in a sequencing or microsequencing assay for determining the identity of the nucleotide at a PG-3- related biallelic marker. A third preferred polynucleotide may be used in an enzyme-based mismatch detection assay for determining the identity ofthe nucleotide at a PG-3 -related biallelic marker. A fourth preferred polynucleotide may be used in amplifying a segment of polynucleotides comprising a PG-3-related biallelic marker. Optionally, any of the polynucleotides described above may be attached to a solid support, array, or addressable array; Optionally, said polynucleotide may be labeled. Additionally, the invention encompasses the use of any polynucleotide for, or any polynucleotide for use in amplifying a segment of nucleotides comprising a PG-3-related biallelic marker. In addition, the polynucleotides of the invention for use in amplifying a segment of nucleotides comprising a PG-3 -related biallelic marker encompass polynucleotides with any further limitation descnbed in this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or in any combination: Optionally, said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers m linkage disequihbπum therewith; optionally, said PG-3 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A5 and A8 to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, said PG-3 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting A6 and A7, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; Optionally, said polynucleotide may comprise a sequence disclosed in the present specification; Optionally, said polynucleotide may comprise, consist of, or consist essentially of any polynucleotide descnbed in the present specification; Optionally, said amplifying may involve PCR or LCR. Optionally, said polynucleotide may be attached to a solid support, array, or addressable array. Optionally, said polynucleotide may be labeled. The pnmers for amplification or sequencing reaction of a polynucleotide compnsmg a biallelic marker ofthe invention may be designed from the disclosed sequences for any method known in the art. A preferred set of primers are fashioned such that the 3' end ofthe contiguous span of identity with a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2 or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof is present at the 3' end of the pnmer. Such a configuration allows the 3' end ofthe primer to hybridize to a selected nucleic acid sequence and dramatically increases the efficiency of the pnmer for amplification or sequencing reactions Allele specific primers may be designed such that a polymoφhic base of a biallelic marker is at the 3' end of the contiguous span and the contiguous span is present at the 3' end of the pnmer. Such allele specific pnmers tend to selectively prime an amplification or sequencing reaction so long as they are used with a nucleic acid sample that contains one of the two alleles present at a biallelic marker. The 3' end of the primer of the invention may be located within or at least 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 50, 100, 250, 500, or 1000 nucleotides upstream of a PG-3-related biallelic marker in said sequence or at any other location which is appropriate for their intended use in sequencing, amplification or the location of novel sequences or markers. Thus, another set of preferred amplification primers comprise an isolated polynucleotide consisting essentially of a contiguous span of at least 8, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, or 50 nucleotides in length of a sequence selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2 or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3'end of said polynucleotide, and wherein the 3'end of said polynucleotide is located upstream of a PG-3-related biallelic marker in said sequence. Preferably, those amplification pnmers comprise a sequence selected from the group consisting of the sequences Bl to B52 and Cl to C52. Pnmers with their 3' ends located 1 nucleotide upstream of a biallelic marker of PG-3 have a special utility as microsequencing assays. Preferred microsequencing primers are descπbed in Table 4. Optionally, said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbπum therewith; optionally, said PG-3 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A5 and A8 to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting A6 and A7, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; Optionally, microsequencing pnmers are selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of Dl to D4, D6 to D80, El to E4 and E6 to E80. More preferred microsequencing primers are selected from the group consisting of the nucleotides sequences of D14, D46, D68, D70, D71, E3, E6, E7, El 1, E13, E42, E44, E72 and E75. The probes of the present invention may be designed from the disclosed sequences for use in any method known in the art, particularly methods for testing if a marker disclosed herein is present in a sample. A preferred set of probes may be designed for use in the hybridization assays of the invention in any manner known in the art such that they selectively bind to one allele of a biallelic marker, but not the other under any particular set of assay conditions. Preferred hybridization probes comprise the polymoφhic base of either allele 1 or allele 2 ofthe relevant biallelic marker. Optionally, said biallelic marker may be within 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, or 1 nucleotides of the center of the hybridization probe or at the center of said probe. In a preferred embodiment, the probes are selected from the group consisting of the sequences PI to P4 and P6 to P80 and the complementary sequence thereto. It should be noted that the polynucleotides of the present invention are not limited to having the exact flanking sequences surrounding the polymoφhic bases which are enumerated in Sequence Listing. Rather, it will be appreciated that the flanking sequences surrounding the biallelic markers may be lengthened or shortened to any extent compatible with their intended use and the present invention specifically contemplates such sequences. The flanking regions outside of the contiguous span need not be homologous to native flanking sequences which actually occur in human subjects. The addition of any nucleotide sequence which is compatible with the polynucleotide's intended use is specifically contemplated. Primers and probes may be labeled or immobilized on a solid support as described in the section entitled "Oligonucleotide probes and primers". The polynucleotides of the invention which are attached to a solid support encompass polynucleotides with any further limitation described in this disclosure, or those following, alone or m any combination: Optionally, said polynucleotides may be attached individually or in groups of at least 2, 5, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 25 distinct polynucleotides of the invention to a single solid support. Optionally, polynucleotides other than those of the invention may attached to the same solid support as polynucleotides ofthe invention. Optionally, when multiple polynucleotides are attached to a solid support they may be attached at random locations, or in an ordered array. Optionally, said ordered array may be addressable. The present invention also encompasses diagnostic kits comprising one or more polynucleotides of the invention with a portion or all ofthe necessary reagents and instructions for genotyping a test subject by determining the identity of a nucleotide at a PG-3-related biallelic marker. The polynucleotides of a kit may optionally be attached to a solid support, or be part of an array or addressable array of polynucleotides. The kit may provide for the determination ofthe identity of the nucleotide at a marker position by any method known in the art including, but not limited to, a sequencing assay method, a microsequencing assay method, a hybridization assay method, or an enzyme-based mismatch detection assay method. METHODS FOR DE NOVO IDENTIFICATION OF BIALLELIC MARKERS Any of a variety of methods can be used to screen a genomic fragment for single nucleotide polymoφhisms, including methods such as differential hybridization with oligonucleotide probes, detection of changes in the mobility measured by gel electrophoresis or direct sequencing of the amplified nucleic acid. A preferred method for identifying biallelic markers involves comparative sequencing of genomic DNA fragments from an appropnate number of unrelated individuals In a first embodiment, DNA samples from unrelated individuals are pooled together, following which the genomic DNA of interest is amplified and sequenced. The nucleotide sequences thus obtained are then analyzed to identify significant polymoφhisms. One ofthe major advantages of this method resides in the fact that the pooling of the DNA samples substantially reduces the number of DNA amplification reactions and sequencing reactions, which must be earned out. Moreover, this method is sufficiently sensitive so that a biallelic marker obtained thereby usually demonstrates a sufficient frequency of its less common allele to be useful in conducting association studies. In a second embodiment, the DNA samples are not pooled and are therefore amplified and sequenced individually. This method is usually preferred when biallelic markers need to be identified in order to perform association studies within candidate genes Preferably, highly relevant gene regions such as promoter regions or exon regions may be screened for biallelic markers. A biallelic marker obtained using this method may show a lower degree of informativeness for conducting association studies, e.g. if the frequency of its less frequent allele is less than about 10%. Such a biallelic marker will, however, be sufficiently informative to conduct association studies and it will further be appreciated that including less informative biallelic markers in the genetic analysis studies of the present invention, may, in some cases, allow the direct identification of causal mutations, which may, depending on their penetrance, be rare mutations. The following is a descnption of the various parameters of a preferred method used by the inventors for the identification ofthe biallelic markers of the present invention. Genomic DNA Samples The genomic DNA samples from which the biallelic markers ofthe present invention are generated are preferably obtained from unrelated individuals corresponding to a heterogeneous population of known ethnic background. The number of individuals from whom DNA samples are obtained can vary substantially, but is preferably from about 10 to about 1000, or preferably from about 50 to about 200 individuals. It is usually preferred to collect DNA samples from at least about 100 individuals in order to have sufficient polymoφhic diversity in a given population to identify as many markers as possible and to generate statistically significant results. As for the source ofthe genomic DNA to be subjected to analysis, any test sample can be foreseen without any particular limitation. These test samples include biological samples, which can be tested by the methods ofthe present invention descnbed herein, and include human and animal body fluids such as whole blood, serum, plasma, cerebrospmal fluid, unne, lymph fluids, and various external secretions of the respiratory, intestinal and genitounnary tracts, tears, saliva, milk, white blood cells, myelomas and the like; biological fluids such as cell culture supernatants; fixed tissue specimens including tumor and non-tumor tissue and lymph node tissues; bone marrow aspirates and fixed cell specimens The preferred source of genomic DNA used in the present invention is from peripheral venous blood of each donor Techniques to prepare genomic DNA from biological samples are well known to the skilled technician. Details of a preferred embodiment are provided in Example 1. The person skilled in the art can choose to amplify pooled or unpooled DNA samples. DNA Amplification The identification of biallelic markers m a sample of genomic DNA may be facilitated through the use of DNA amplification methods DNA samples can be pooled or unpooled for the amplification step. DNA amplification techniques are well known to those skilled in the art Amplification techniques that can be used in the context of the present invention include, but are not limited to, the ligase chain reaction (LCR) descnbed in EP-A- 320 308, WO 9320227 and EP-A-439 182, the polymerase chain reaction (PCR, RT-PCR) and techniques such as the nucleic acid sequence based amplification (NASBA) descnbed in Guatelh J.C., et al (1990) and in Compton J (1991), Q-beta amplification as descnbed in European Patent Application No 4544610, strand displacement amplification as descnbed in Walker et al (1996) and EP A 684 315 and, target mediated amplification as described in PCT Publication WO 9322461. LCR and Gap LCR are exponential amplification techniques, both of which utilize DNA ligase to join adjacent primers annealed to a DNA molecule. In Ligase Chain Reaction (LCR), probe pairs are used which include two primary (first and second) and two secondary (third and fourth) probes, all of which are employed in molar excess to target. The first probe hybridizes to a first segment of the target strand and the second probe hybndizes to a second segment ofthe target strand, the first and second segments being contiguous so that the primary probes abut one another in 5' phosphate-3 'hydroxyl relationship, and so that a ligase can covalently fuse or hgate the two probes into a fused product In addition, a third (secondary) probe can hybridize to a portion of the first probe and a fourth (secondary) probe can hybπdize to a portion of the second probe in a similar abutting fashion. Of course, if the target is initially double stranded, the secondary probes also will hybridize to the target complement in the first instance. Once the ligated strand of pπmary probes is separated from the target strand, it will hybndize with the third and fourth probes, which can be ligated to form a complementary, secondary ligated product. It is important to realize that the ligated products are functionally equivalent to either the target or its complement. By repeated cycles of hybridization and ligation, amplification ofthe target sequence is achieved. A method for multiplex LCR has also been descnbed (WO 9320227). Gap LCR (GLCR) is a version of LCR where the probes are not adjacent but are separated by 2 to 3 bases. For amplification of mRNAs, it is within the scope ofthe present invention to reverse transcribe mRNA into cDNA followed by polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR), or, to use a single enzyme for both steps as descnbed in U S Patent No 5,322,770 or, to use Asymmetric Gap LCR (RT-AGLCR) as described by Marshall et al (1994). AGLCR is a modification of GLCR that allows the amplification of RNA. The PCR technology is the preferred amplification technique used in the present invention. A variety of PCR techniques are familiar to those skilled in the art. For a review of PCR technology, see White (1992) and the publication entitled "PCR Methods and Applications" (1991, Cold Spnng Harbor Laboratory Press). In each of these PCR procedures, PCR pnmers on either side ofthe nucleic acid sequences to be amplified are added to a suitably prepared nucleic acid sample along with dNTPs and a thermostable polymerase such as Taq polymerase, Pfu polymerase, or Vent polymerase. The nucleic acid in the sample is denatured and the PCR primers are specifically hybridized to complementary nucleic acid sequences in the sample. The hybridized primers are extended. Thereafter, another cycle of denaturation, hybridization, and extension is initiated. The cycles are repeated multiple times to produce an amplified fragment containing the nucleic acid sequence between the pnmer sites. PCR has further been described in several patents including US Patents 4,683,195; 4,683,202; and 4,965,188 The PCR technology is the preferred amplification technique used to identify new biallelic markers. A typical example of a PCR reaction suitable for the puφoses of the present invention is provided in Example 2. One ofthe aspects ofthe present invention is a method for the amplification ofthe human PG-3 gene, particularly of a fragment ofthe genomic sequence of SEQ ID No 1 or of the cDNA sequence of SEQ ID No 2, or a fragment or a vanant thereof in a test sample, preferably using the PCR technology. This method compnses the steps of: a) contacting a test sample with amplification reaction reagents compnsing a pair of amplification primers as descπbed above which are located on either side of the polynucleotide region to be amplified, and b) optionally, detecting the amplification products. The invention also concerns a kit for the amplification of a PG-3 gene sequence, particularly of a portion ofthe genomic sequence of SEQ ID No 1 or ofthe cDNA sequence of SEQ ID NO 2, or a variant thereof in a test sample, wherein said kit comprises: a) a pair of oligonucleotide pnmers located on either side of the PG-3 region to be amplified, b) optionally, the reagents necessary for performing the amplification reaction. In one embodiment ofthe above amplification method and kit, the amplification product is detected by hybndization with a labeled probe having a sequence which is complementary to the amplified region In another embodiment ofthe above amplification method and kit, primers comprise a sequence which is selected from the group consisting of the nucleotide sequences of Bl to B52, Cl to C52, Dl to D4, D6 to D80, El to E4, and E6 to E80. In a first embodiment of the present invention, biallelic markers are identified using genomic sequence information generated by the inventors Sequenced genomic DNA fragments are used to design pnmers for the amplification of 500 bp fragments. These 500 bp fragments are amplified from genomic DNA and are scanned for biallelic markers Primers may be designed using the OSP software (Hilher L. and Green P., 1991). All pnmers may contain, upstream ofthe specific target bases, a common oligonucleotide tail that serves as a sequencing primer Those skilled m the art are familiar with primer extensions, which can be used for these puφoses Preferred primers, useful for the amplification of genomic sequences encoding the candidate genes, focus on promoters, exons and splice sites of the genes A biallelic marker presents a higher probability to be a causal mutation if it is located in these functional regions of the gene Preferred amplification pnmers ofthe invention include the nucleotide sequences Bl to B52 and Cl to C52, detailed further in Example 2, Table 1 Sequencing Of Amplified Genomic DNA And Identification Of Single Nucleotide Polymorphisms The amplification products generated as descnbed above, are then sequenced using any method known and available to the skilled technician. Methods for sequencing DNA using either the dideoxy-mediated method (Sanger method) or the Maxam-Gilbert method are widely known to those of ordinary skill in the art Such methods are disclosed in Sambrook et al (1989) for example. Alternative approaches include hybndization to high-density DNA probe arrays as described m Chee et α/ (1996) Preferably, the amplified DNA is subjected to automated dideoxy terminator sequencing reactions using a dye-primer cycle sequencing protocol. The products ofthe sequencing reactions are run on sequencing gels and the sequences are determined using gel image analysis. The polymoφhism search is based on the presence of supenmposed peaks in the electrophoresis pattern resulting from different bases occurπng at the same position. Because each dideoxy terminator is labeled with a different fluorescent molecule, the two peaks corresponding to a biallelic site present distinct colors corresponding to two different nucleotides at the same position on the sequence. However, the presence of two peaks can be an artifact due to background noise. To exclude such an artifact, the two DNA strands are sequenced and a comparison between the peaks is earned out. In order to confirm that a sequence is polymoφhic, the polymoφhism is be detected on both strands. The above procedure permits those amplification products which contain biallelic markers to be identified. The detection limit for the frequency of biallelic polymoφhisms detected by sequencing pools of 100 individuals is approximately 0.1 for the minor allele, as verified by sequencing pools of known allelic frequencies. However, more than 90% ofthe biallelic polymoφhisms detected by the pooling method have a frequency for the minor allele higher than 0.25. Therefore, the biallelic markers selected by this method have a frequency of at least 0.1 for the minor allele and less than 0.9 for the major allele. Preferably, the biallelic markers selected by this method have a frequency of at least 0.2 for the minor allele and less than 0.8 for the major allele, more preferably at least 0 3 for the minor allele and less than 0.7 for the major allele. Thus, the biallelic markers preferably have a heterozygosity rate higher than 0.18, more preferably higher than 0.32, still more preferably higher than 0.42. In another embodiment, biallelic markers are detected by sequencing individual DNA samples. In some embodiments, the frequency of the minor allele of such a biallelic marker may be less than 0.1. Validation Of The Biallelic Markers Of The Present Invention The polymoφhisms are evaluated for their usefulness as genetic markers by validating that both alleles are present in a population Validation of the biallelic markers is accomplished by genotypmg a group of individuals by a method ofthe invention and demonstrating that both alleles are present. Microsequencing is a preferred method of genotypmg alleles. The validation by genotypmg step may be performed on individual samples derived from each individual in the group or by genotypmg a pooled sample deπved from more than one individual The group can be as small as one individual if that individual is heterozygous for the allele in question. Preferably the group contains at least three individuals, more preferably the group contains five or six individuals, so that a single validation test will be more likely to result in the validation of more of the biallelic markers that are being tested. It should be noted, however, that when the validation test is performed on a small group it may result in a false negative result if as a result of sampling error none ofthe individuals tested carries one of the two alleles. Thus, the validation process is less useful in demonstrating that a particular initial result is an artifact, than it is at demonstrating that there is a bonafide biallelic marker at a particular position in a sequence. All of the genotypmg, haplotypmg, association, and interaction study methods ofthe invention may optionally be performed solely with validated biallelic markers. Evaluation Of The Frequency Of The Biallelic Markers Of The Present Invention The validated biallelic markers are further evaluated for their usefulness as genetic markers by determining the frequency of the least common allele at the biallelic marker site. The higher the frequency ofthe less common allele the greater the usefulness of the biallelic marker in association and interaction studies. The identification of the least common allele is accomplished by genotypmg a group of individuals by a method of the invention and demonstrating that both alleles are present. The determination of marker frequency by genotypmg may be performed using individual samples denved from each individual in the group or by genotypmg a pooled sample derived from more than one individual. The group must be large enough to be representative ofthe population as a whole. Preferably the group contains at least 20 individuals, more preferably the group contains at least 50 individuals, most preferably the group contains at least 100 individuals. Of course the larger the group the greater the accuracy of the frequency determination because of reduced sampling error. A biallelic marker wherein the frequency of the less common allele is 30% or more is termed a "high quality biallelic marker." All ofthe genotyping, haplotyping, association, and interaction study methods ofthe invention may optionally be performed solely with high quality biallelic markers. METHODS FOR GENOTYPING AN INDIVIDUAL FOR BIALLELIC MARKERS Methods are provided to genotype a biological sample for one or more biallelic markers of the present invention, all of which may be performed in vitro Such methods of genotyping comprise determining the identity of a nucleotide at a PG-3 biallelic marker site by any method known in the art. These methods find use in genotyping case-control populations in association studies as well as individuals m the context of detection of alleles of biallelic markers which are known to be associated with a given trait, in which case both copies ofthe biallelic marker present in individual's genome are determined so that an individual may be classified as homozygous or heterozygous for a particular allele. These genotyping methods can be performed on nucleic acid samples deπved from a single individual or pooled DNA samples. Genotyping can be performed using methods similar to those descnbed above for the identification ofthe biallelic markers, or using other genotyping methods such as those further described below In preferred embodiments, the comparison of sequences of amplified genomic fragments from different individuals is used to identify new biallelic markers whereas microsequencing is used for genotyping known biallelic markers in diagnostic and association study applications. In one embodiment, the invention encompasses methods of genotyping comprising determining the identity of a nucleotide at a PG-3 -related biallelic marker or the complement thereof in a biological sample; optionally, the PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A5 and A8 to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A6 and A7, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith; optionally, the biological sample is deπved from a single subject; optionally, the identity ofthe nucleotides at said biallelic marker is determined for both copies of said biallelic marker present in said individual's genome; optionally, said biological sample is derived from multiple subjects; Optionally, the genotyping methods ofthe invention encompass methods with any further limitation described in this disclosure, or those following, alone or in any combination; Optionally, said method is performed in vitro; optionally, the method further compπses amplifying a portion of said sequence comprising the biallelic marker pnor to said determining step; Optionally, the amphfyication is performed by PCR, LCR, or replication of a recombinant vector comprising an ongin of replication and said fragment in a host cell; optionally, the determination involves a hybndization assay, a sequencing assay, a microsequencing assay, or an enzyme-based mismatch detection assay. Source of Nucleic Acids for genotyping Any source of nucleic acids, in purified or non-purified form, can be utilized as the starting nucleic acid, provided it contains or is suspected of containing the specific nucleic acid sequence desired. DNA or RNA may be extracted from cells, tissues, body fluids and the like as descπbed above. While nucleic acids for use in the genotyping methods of the invention can be denved from any mammalian source, the test subjects and individuals from which nucleic acid samples are taken are generally understood to be human. Amplification Of DNA Fragments Comprising Biallelic Markers Methods and polynucleotides are provided to amplify a segment of nucleotides comprising one or more biallelic marker ofthe present invention. It will be appreciated that amplification of DNA fragments comprising biallelic markers may be used in various methods and for vanous puφoses and is not restricted to genotyping. Nevertheless, many genotyping methods, although not all, require the previous amplification ofthe DNA region carrying the biallelic marker of interest. Such methods specifically increase the concentration or total number of sequences that span the biallelic marker or include that site and sequences located either distal or proximal to it. Diagnostic assays may also rely on amplification of DNA segments carrying a biallelic marker ofthe present invention. Amplification of DNA may be achieved by any method known in the art. Amplification techniques are described above in the section entitled, "DNA amplification." Some of these amplification methods are particularly suited for the detection of single nucleotide polymoφhisms and allow the simultaneous amplification of a target sequence and the identification ofthe polymoφhic nucleotide as further described below. The identification of biallelic markers as described above allows the design of appropnate oligonucleotides, which can be used as pnmers to amplify DNA fragments comprising the biallelic markers ofthe present invention. Amplification can be performed using the primers initially used to discover new biallelic markers which are descnbed herein or any set of pnmers allowing the amplification of a DNA fragment comprising a biallelic marker of the present invention In some embodiments, the present invention provides pnmers for amplifying a DNA fragment containing one or more biallelic markers of the present invention. Preferred amplification primers are listed in Example 2. It will be appreciated that the pnmers listed are merely exemplary and that any other set of pnmers which produce amplification products containing one or more biallelic markers ofthe present invention are also of use. The spacing of the pnmers determines the length ofthe segment to be amplified. In the context of the present invention, amplified segments carrying biallelic markers can range m size from at least about 25 bp to 35 kbp. Amplification fragments from 25-3000 bp are typical, fragments from 50-1000 bp are preferred and fragments from 100-600 bp are highly preferred. It will be appreciated that amplification pnmers for the biallelic markers may be any sequence which allow the specific amplification of any DNA fragment carrying the markers. Amplification pnmers may be labeled or immobilized on a solid support as described in the section "Oligonucleotide probes and primers" Methods of Genotyping DNA samples for Biallelic Markers Any method known in the art can be used to identify the nucleotide present at a biallelic marker site. Since the biallelic marker allele to be detected has been identified and specified in the present invention, detection will prove simple for one of ordinary skill in the art by employing any of a number of techniques Many genotyping methods require the previous amplification of the DNA region carrying the biallelic marker of interest While the amplification of target or signal is often preferred at present, ultrasensitive detection methods which do not require amplification are also encompassed by the present genotyping methods Methods well-known to those skilled in the art that can be used to detect biallelic polymoφhisms include methods such as, conventional dot blot analyzes, single strand conformational polymoφhism analysis (SSCP) described by Oπta et α/.(1989), denaturing gradient gel electrophoresis (DGGE), heteroduplex analysis, mismatch cleavage detection, and other conventional techniques as descnbed in Sheffield et al (1991), White et al (1992), Grompe et al (1989 and 1993). Another method for determining the identity ofthe nucleotide present at a particular polymoφhic site employs a specialized exonuclease-resistant nucleotide denvative as descπbed in US patent 4,656,127. Preferred methods involve directly determining the identity of the nucleotide present at a biallelic marker site by sequencing assay, enzyme-based mismatch detection assay, or hybridization assay. The following is a descnption of some preferred methods. A highly preferred method is the microsequencing technique. The term "sequencing" is generally used herein to refer to polymerase extension of duplex pπmer/template complexes and includes both traditional sequencing and microsequencing. 1) Sequencing Assays The nucleotide present at a polymoφhic site can be determined by sequencing methods. In a preferred embodiment, DNA samples are subjected to PCR amplification before sequencing as described above. DNA sequencing methods are described in the section entitled "Sequencing Of Amplified Genomic DNA And Identification Of Single Nucleotide Polymorphisms". Preferably, the amplified DNA is subjected to automated dideoxy terminator sequencing reactions using a dye-primer cycle sequencing protocol. Sequence analysis allows the identification of the base present at the biallelic marker site. 2) Microsequencing Assays In microsequencing methods, the nucleotide at a polymoφhic site in a target DNA is detected by a single nucleotide pnmer extension reaction. This method involves appropnate microsequencing primers which hybridize just upstream of the polymoφhic base of interest in the target nucleic acid. A polymerase is used to specifically extend the 3' end of the primer with one single ddNTP (chain terminator) complementary to the nucleotide at the polymoφhic site. Next the identity ofthe incoφorated nucleotide is determined in any suitable way. Typically, microsequencing reactions are carried out using fluorescent ddNTPs and the extended microsequencing primers are analyzed by electrophoresis on ABI 377 sequencing machines to determine the identity of the incoφorated nucleotide as described in EP 412 883. Alternatively capillary electrophoresis can be used in order to process a higher number of assays simultaneously. An example of a typical microsequencing procedure that can be used in the context of the present invention is provided in Example 4. Different approaches can be used for the labeling and detection of ddNTPs A homogeneous phase detection method based on fluorescence resonance energy transfer has been described by Chen and Kwok (1997) and Chen et al (1997). In this method, amplified genomic DNA fragments containing polymoφhic sites are incubated with a 5'-fluorescein-labeled primer in the presence of allelic dye-labeled dideoxynbonucleoside tπphosphates and a modified Taq polymerase The dye -labeled pnmer is extended one base by the dye-terminator specific for the allele present on the template. At the end ofthe genotyping reaction, the fluorescence intensities of the two dyes in the reaction mixture are analyzed directly without separation or purification. All these steps can be performed in the same tube and the fluorescence changes can be monitored in real time. Alternatively, the extended pnmer may be analyzed by MALDI-TOF Mass Spectrometry. The base at the polymoφhic site is identified by the mass added onto the microsequencing primer (see Haff and Smirnov, 1997). Microsequencing may be achieved by the established microsequencing method or by developments or derivatives thereof. Alternative methods include several solid-phase microsequencing techniques. The basic microsequencing protocol is the same as descπbed previously, except that the method is conducted as a heterogeneous phase assay, in which the pnmer or the target molecule is immobilized or captured onto a solid support. To simplify the pnmer separation and the terminal nucleotide addition analysis, oligonucleotides are attached to solid supports or are modified in such ways that permit affinity separation as well as polymerase extension. The 5' ends and internal nucleotides of synthetic oligonucleotides can be modified in a number of different ways to permit different affinity separation approaches, e.g., biotinylation. If a single affinity group is used on the oligonucleotides, the oligonucleotides can be separated from the incoφorated terminator regent This eliminates the need of physical or size separation. More than one oligonucleotide can be separated from the terminator reagent and analyzed simultaneously if more than one affinity group is used. This permits the analysis of several nucleic acid species or more nucleic acid sequence information per extension reaction. The affinity group need not be on the pnmmg oligonucleotide but could alternatively be present on the template. For example, immobilization can be carried out via an interaction between biotinylated DNA and streptavidin- coated microtitration wells or avidin-coated polystyrene particles. In the same manner, oligonucleotides or templates may be attached to a solid support in a high-density format. In such solid phase microsequencing reactions, incoφorated ddNTPs can be radiolabeled (Syvanen, 1994) or linked to fluorescein (Livak and Hainer, 1994). The detection of radiolabeled ddNTPs can be achieved through scintillation-based techniques. The detection of fluorescem-lmked ddNTPs can be based on the bmdmg of antifluorescem antibody conjugated with alkaline phosphatase, followed by incubation with a chromogenic substrate (such as ^-mtrophenyl phosphate). Other possible reporter-detection pairs include: ddNTP linked to dinitrophenyl (DNP) and anti-DNP alkaline phosphatase conjugate (Harju et al , 1993) or biotinylated ddNTP and horseradish peroxidase- conjugated streptavidm with o-phenylenediamme as a substrate (WO 92/15712) As yet another alternative solid-phase microsequencing procedure, Nyren et al (1993) descnbed a method relying on the detection of DNA polymerase activity by an enzymatic lummometπc inorganic pyrophosphate detection assay (ELIDA). Pastinen et al (1997) descπbe a method for multiplex detection of single nucleotide polymoφhism in which the solid phase minisequencing pπnciple is applied to an oligonucleotide array format. High-density arrays of DNA probes attached to a solid support (DNA chips) are further descnbed below. In one aspect the present invention provides polynucleotides and methods to genotype one or more biallelic markers of the present invention by performing a microsequencing assay. Preferred microsequencing pnmers include the nucleotide sequences Dl to D4 and D6 to D80 and El to E4 and E6 to E80. It will be appreciated that the microsequencing pnmers listed in Example 4 are merely exemplary and that any primer having a 3' end immediately adjacent to the polymoφhic nucleotide may be used. Similarly, it will be appreciated that microsequencing analysis may be performed for any biallelic marker or any combination of biallelic markers of the present invention. One aspect ofthe present invention is a solid support which includes one or more microsequencing primers listed in Example 4, or fragments compπsing at least 8, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, or 50 consecutive nucleotides thereof, to the extent that such lengths are consistent with the primer descnbed, and having a 3' terminus immediately upstream ofthe corresponding biallelic marker, for determining the identity of a nucleotide at a biallelic marker site. 3) Mismatch detection assays based on polymerases and ligases In one aspect the present invention provides polynucleotides and methods to determine the allele of one or more biallelic markers of the present invention m a biological sample, by mismatch detection assays based on polymerases and/or ligases. These assays are based on the specificity of polymerases and ligases. Polymerization reactions place particularly stnngent requirements on correct base pamng ofthe 3' end ofthe amplification primer and the joining of two oligonucleotides hybridized to a target DNA sequence is quite sensitive to mismatches close to the ligation site, especially at the 3' end. Methods, pnmers and vanous parameters to amplify DNA fragments comprising biallelic markers of the present invention are further described above in the section entitled "Amplification Of DNA Fragments Comprising Biallelic Markers". Allele Specific Amplification Primers Discnmination between the two alleles of a biallelic marker can also be achieved by allele specific amplification, a selective strategy whereby one of the alleles is amplified without amplification of the other allele. For allele specific amplification, at least one member of the pair of primers is sufficiently complementary with a region of a PG-3 gene comprising the polymoφhic base of a biallelic marker ofthe present invention to hybridize therewith and to initiate the amplification. Such primers are able to discnminate between the two alleles of a biallelic marker. This is accomplished by placing the polymoφhic base at the 3' end of one of the amplification pnmers. Because the extension progresses from the 3'end of the primer, a mismatch at or near this position has an inhibitory effect on amplification Therefore, under appropriate amplification conditions, these primers only direct amplification on their complementary allele. Determining the precise location of the mismatch and the corresponding assay conditions are well withm the ordinary skill in the art. Ligation/Amplification Based Methods The "Oligonucleotide Ligation Assay" (OLA) uses two oligonucleotides which are designed to be capable of hybridizing to abutting sequences of a single strand of a target molecules. One ofthe oligonucleotides is biotinylated, and the other is detectably labeled. If the precise complementary sequence is found in a target molecule, the oligonucleotides will hybπdize such that their termini abut, and create a ligation substrate that can be captured and detected. OLA is capable of detecting single nucleotide polymoφhisms and may be advantageously combined with PCR as described by Nickerson et α/.(1990). In this method, PCR is used to achieve the exponential amplification of target DNA, which is then detected using OLA. Other amplification methods which are particularly suited for the detection of single nucleotide polymoφhism include LCR (ligase chain reaction), Gap LCR (GLCR) which are described above in the section entitled "DNA Amplification". LCR uses two pairs of probes to exponentially amplify a specific target. The sequences of each pair of oligonucleotides are selected to permit the pair to hybndize to abutting sequences ofthe same strand of the target. Such hybridization forms a substrate for a template-dependant ligase. In accordance with the present invention, LCR can be performed with oligonucleotides having the proximal and distal sequences of the same strand of a biallelic marker site. In one embodiment, either oligonucleotide will be designed to include the biallelic marker site. In such an embodiment, the reaction conditions are selected such that the oligonucleotides can be ligated together only if the target molecule either contains or lacks the specific nucleotide that is complementary to the biallelic marker on the oligonucleotide. In an alternative embodiment, the oligonucleotides will not include the biallelic marker, such that when they hybridize to the target molecule, a "gap" is created as described in WO 90/01069. This gap is then "filled" with complementary dNTPs (as mediated by DNA polymerase), or by an additional pair of oligonucleotides. Thus at the end of each cycle, each single strand has a complement capable of serving as a target dunng the next cycle and exponential allele-specific amplification ofthe desired sequence is obtained. Ligase/Polymerase-mediated Genetic Bit Analysis™ is another method for determining the identity of a nucleotide at a preselected site in a nucleic acid molecule (WO 95/21271). This method involves the mcoφoration of a nucleoside triphosphate that is complementary to the nucleotide present at the preselected site onto the terminus of a pnmer molecule, and their subsequent ligation to a second oligonucleotide. The reaction is monitored by detecting a specific label attached to the reaction's solid phase or by detection in solution. 4) Hybridization Assay Methods A preferred method of determining the identity of the nucleotide present at a biallelic marker site involves nucleic acid hybndization. The hybridization probes, which can be conveniently used m such reactions, preferably include the probes defined herein. Any hybridization assay may be used including Southern hybridization, Northern hybridization, dot blot hybndization and solid-phase hybridization (see Sambrook et al , 1989). Hybridization refers to the formation of a duplex structure by two single stranded nucleic acids due to complementary base pairing. Hybndization can occur between exactly complementary nucleic acid strands or between nucleic acid strands that contain minor regions of mismatch. Specific probes can be designed that hybridize to one form of a biallelic marker and not to the other and therefore are able to discriminate between different allelic forms. Allele-specific probes are often used in pairs, one member of a pair showing perfect match to a target sequence containing the original allele and the other showing a perfect match to the target sequence containing the alternative allele. Hybridization conditions should be sufficiently stnngent that there is a significant difference in hybridization intensity between alleles, and preferably an essentially binary response, whereby a probe hybπdizes to only one of the alleles. Stnngent, sequence specific hybndization conditions, under which a probe will hybridize only to the exactly complementary target sequence are well known in the art (Sambrook et al , 1989). Stringent conditions are sequence dependent and will be different m different circumstances. Generally, stringent conditions are selected to be about 5°C lower than the thermal melting point (Tm) for the specific sequence at a defined ionic strength and pH. Although such hybridization can be performed in solution, it is preferred to employ a solid-phase hybridization assay The target DNA compπsing a biallelic marker of the present invention may be amplified pnor to the hybndization reaction. The presence of a specific allele in the sample is determined by detecting the presence or the absence of stable hybrid duplexes formed between the probe and the target DNA. The detection of hybnd duplexes can be earned out by a number of methods. Various detection assay formats are well known which utilize detectable labels bound to either the target or the probe to enable detection of the hybnd duplexes Typically, hybndization duplexes are separated from unhybπdized nucleic acids and the labels bound to the duplexes are then detected. Those skilled in the art will recognize that wash steps may be employed to wash away excess target DNA or probe as well as unbound conjugate. Further, standard heterogeneous assay formats are suitable for detecting the hybrids using the labels present on the primers and probes. Two recently developed assays allow hybridization-based allele discrimination with no need for separations or washes (see Landegren U. et al , 1998). The TaqMan assay takes advantage ofthe 5' nuclease activity of Taq DNA polymerase to digest a DNA probe annealed specifically to the accumulating amplification product TaqMan probes are labeled with a donor-acceptor dye pair that interacts via fluorescence energy transfer Cleavage of the TaqMan probe by the advancing polymerase dunng amplification dissociates the donor dye from the quenching acceptor dye, greatly increasing the donor fluorescence. All reagents necessary to detect two allelic variants can be assembled at the beginning ofthe reaction and the results are monitored in real time (see Livak et al , 1995) In an alternative homogeneous hybridization based procedure, molecular beacons are used for allele discriminations. Molecular beacons are haiφin-shaped oligonucleotide probes that report the presence of specific nucleic acids in homogeneous solutions. When they bind to their targets they undergo a conformational reorganization that restores the fluorescence of an internally quenched fluorophore (Tyagi et al , 1998). The polynucleotides provided herein can be used to produce probes which can be used m hybridization assays for the detection of biallelic marker alleles in biological samples. These probes preferably compnse between 8 and 50 nucleotides and are sufficiently complementary to a sequence comprising a biallelic marker ofthe present invention to hybndize thereto and preferably sufficiently specific to be able to discnmmate the targeted sequence for only one nucleotide variation. A particularly preferred probe is 25 nucleotides in length. Preferably the biallelic marker is within 4 nucleotides ofthe center ofthe polynucleotide probe. In particularly preferred probes, the biallelic marker is at the center of said polynucleotide Preferred probes compnse a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of amphcons listed in Table 1 and the sequences complementary thereto, or a fragment thereof, said fragment compπsing at least about 8 consecutive nucleotides, preferably 10, 15, 20, more preferably 25, 30, 40, 47, or 50 consecutive nucleotides and containing a polymoφhic base. Preferred probes comprise a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of PI to P4 and P6 to P80 and the sequences complementary thereto. In preferred embodiments the polymoφhic base(s) are within 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, nucleotides ofthe center of the said polynucleotide, more preferably at the center of said polynucleotide. Preferably the probes of the present invention are labeled or immobilized on a solid support. Labels and solid supports are further described in the section entitled "Oligonucleotide Probes and Primers". The probes can be non-extendable as described in the section entitled "Oligonucleotide Probes and Primers". By assaying the hybridization to an allele specific probe, one can detect the presence or absence of a biallelic marker allele in a given sample. High-Throughput parallel hybridization in array format is specifically encompassed within "hybridization assays" and is described below. 5) Hybridization To Addressable Arrays Of Oligonucleotides Hybridization assays based on oligonucleotide arrays rely on the differences in hybridization stability of short oligonucleotides to perfectly matched and mismatched target sequence vanants. Efficient access to polymoφhism information is obtained through a basic structure compπsing high-density arrays of oligonucleotide probes attached to a solid support (e.g., the chip) at selected positions. Each DNA chip can contain thousands to millions of individual synthetic DNA probes arranged in a gπd-hke pattern and miniaturized to the size of a dime. The chip technology has already been applied with success in numerous cases. For example, the screening of mutations has been undertaken in the BRCA1 gene, in S. cerevisiae mutant strains, and in the protease gene of HIV- 1 virus (Hacia et al , 1996; Shoemaker et al , 1996, Kozal et al , 1996). Chips of vaπous formats for use in detecting biallelic polymoφhisms can be produced on a customized basis by Affymetπx (GeneChip™), Hyseq (HyChip and HyGnostics), and Protogene Laboratories. In general, these methods employ arrays of oligonucleotide probes that are complementary to target nucleic acid sequence segments from an individual which, target sequences include a polymoφhic marker EP 785280, describes a tiling strategy for the detection of single nucleotide polymoφhisms. Briefly, arrays may generally be "tiled" for a large number of specific polymorphisms. By "tiling" is generally meant the synthesis of a defined set of oligonucleotide probes which is made up of a sequence complementary to the target sequence of interest, as well as preselected variations of that sequence, e g., substitution of one or more given positions with one or more members ofthe basis set of nucleotides. Tiling strategies are further descnbed in PCT application No. WO 95/11995. In a particular aspect, arrays are tiled for a number of specific, identified biallelic marker sequences. In particular, the array is tiled to include a number of detection blocks, each detection block being specific for a specific biallelic marker or a set of biallelic markers. For example, a detection block may be tiled to include a number of probes, which span the sequence segment that includes a specific polymoφhism. To obtain probes that are complementary to each allele, the probes are synthesized in pairs diffeπng at the biallelic marker. In addition to the probes diffenng at the polymoφhic base, monosubstituted probes are also generally tiled within the detection block. These monosubstituted probes have bases at and up to a certain number of bases in either direction from the polymoφhism, substituted with the remaining nucleotides (selected from A, T, G, C and U). Typically the probes in a tiled detection block will include substitutions of the sequence positions up to and including those that are 5 bases away from the biallelic marker. The monosubstituted probes provide internal controls for the tiled array, to distinguish actual hybridization from artefactual cross-hybridization. Upon completion of hybridization with the target sequence and washing of the array, the array is scanned to determine the position on the array to which the target sequence hybridizes. The hybndization data from the scanned array is then analyzed to identify which allele or alleles ofthe biallelic marker are present in the sample. Hybndization and scanning may be carried out as described in PCT application No. WO 92/10092 and WO 95/11995 and US patent No. 5,424,186. Thus, in some embodiments, the chips may comprise an array of nucleic acid sequences about 15 nucleotides in length. In further embodiments, the chip may comprise an array including at least one of the sequences selected from the group consisting of amplicons listed in Table 1 and the sequences complementary thereto, or a fragment thereof, said fragment comprising at least about 8 consecutive nucleotides, preferably 10, 15, 20, more preferably 25, 30, 40, 47, or 50 consecutive nucleotides and containing a polymoφhic base. In preferred embodiments the polymoφhic base is within 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, nucleotides of the center ofthe said polynucleotide, more preferably at the center of said polynucleotide. In some embodiments, the chip may comprise an array of at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or more of these polynucleotides of the invention. Solid supports and polynucleotides ofthe present invention attached to solid supports are further descnbed m the section entitled "Oligonucleotide Probes And Primers". 6) Integrated Systems Another technique, which may be used to analyze polymoφhisms, includes multicomponent integrated systems, which mimatunze and compartmentalize processes such as PCR and capillary electrophoresis reactions in a single functional device. An example of such technique is disclosed m US patent 5,589,136, which descnbes the integration of PCR amplification and capillary electrophoresis in chips. Integrated systems can be envisaged mainly when microfluidic systems are used. These systems compnse a pattern of microchannels designed onto a glass, silicon, quartz, or plastic wafer included on a microchip. The movements of the samples are controlled by electnc, electroosmotic or hydrostatic forces applied across different areas of the microchip to create functional microscopic valves and pumps with no moving parts For genotyping biallelic markers, the microfluidic system may integrate nucleic acid amplification, microsequencing, capillary electrophoresis and a detection method such as laser- induced fluorescence detection. METHODS OF GENETIC ANALYSIS USING THE BIALLELIC MARKERS OF THE PRESENT INVENTION Different methods are available for the genetic analysis of complex traits (see Lander and Schork, 1994). The search for disease-susceptibility genes is conducted using two main methods: the linkage approach in which evidence is sought for cosegregation between a locus and a putative trait locus using family studies, and the association approach in which evidence is sought for a statistically significant association between an allele and a trait or a trait causing allele (Khoury et al, 1993). In general, the biallelic markers of the present invention find use in any method known in the art to demonstrate a statistically significant correlation between a genotype and a phenotype. The biallelic markers may be used in parametric and non-parametric linkage analysis methods. Preferably, the biallelic markers of the present invention are used to identify genes associated with detectable traits using association studies, an approach which does not require the use of affected families and which permits the identification of genes associated with complex and sporadic traits. The genetic analysis using the biallelic markers ofthe present invention may be conducted on any scale. The whole set of biallelic markers of the present invention or any subset of biallelic markers of the present invention corresponding to the candidate gene may be used. Further, any set of genetic markers including a biallelic marker ofthe present invention may be used. A set of biallelic polymoφhisms that could be used as genetic markers in combination with the biallelic markers of the present invention has been described in WO 98/20165. As mentioned above, it should be noted that the biallelic markers of the present invention may be included in any complete or partial genetic map ofthe human genome. These different uses are specifically contemplated in the present invention and claims. Linkage Analysis Linkage analysis is based upon establishing a correlation between the transmission of genetic markers and that of a specific trait throughout generations within a family. Thus, the aim of linkage analysis is to detect marker loci that show cosegregation with a trait of interest in pedigrees. PARAMETRIC METHODS When data are available from successive generations there is the opportunity to study the degree of linkage between pairs of loci. Estimates of the recombination fraction enable loci to be ordered and placed onto a genetic map. With loci that are genetic markers, a genetic map can be established, and then the strength of linkage between markers and traits can be calculated and used to indicate the relative positions of markers and genes affecting those traits (Weir, 1996). The classical method for linkage analysis is the logarithm of odds (lod) score method (see Morton, 1955; Ott, 1991). Calculation of lod scores requires specification of the mode of inheritance for the disease (parametnc method). Generally, the length ofthe candidate region identified using linkage analysis is between 2 and 20Mb. Once a candidate region is identified as descπbed above, analysis of recombinant individuals using additional markers allows further delineation of the candidate region. Linkage analysis studies have generally relied on the use of a maximum of 5,000 microsatelhte markers, thus limiting the maximum theoretical attainable resolution of linkage analysis to about 600 kb on average. Linkage analysis has been successfully applied to map simple genetic traits that show clear Mendelian inheritance patterns and which have a high penetrance (i e. , the ratio between the number of trait positive earners of allele a and the total number of a earners in the population). However, parametnc linkage analysis suffers from a vanety of drawbacks. First, it is limited by its reliance on the choice of a genetic model suitable for each studied trait. Furthermore, as already mentioned, the resolution attainable using linkage analysis is limited, and complementary studies are required to refine the analysis of the typical 2Mb to 20Mb regions initially identified through linkage analysis. In addition, parametric linkage analysis approaches have proven difficult when applied to complex genetic traits, such as those due to the combined action of multiple genes and/or environmental factors It is very difficult to model these factors adequately in a lod score analysis. In such cases, too large an effort and cost are needed to recruit the adequate number of affected families required for applying linkage analysis to these situations, as recently discussed by Risch, N. and Meπkangas, K. (1996). NON-PARAMETRIC METHODS The advantage of the so-called non-parametπc methods for linkage analysis is that they do not require specification of the mode of inheritance for the disease, they tend to be more useful for the analysis of complex traits. In non-parametric methods, one tπes to prove that the inhentance pattern of a chromosomal region is not consistent with random Mendelian segregation by showing that affected relatives inherit identical copies of the region more often than expected by chance. Affected relatives should show excess "allele sharing" even in the presence of incomplete penetrance and polygemc mheπtance. In non-parametnc linkage analysis the degree of agreement at a marker locus in two individuals can be measured either by the number of alleles identical by state (IBS) or by the number of alleles identical by descent (IBD). Affected sib pair analysis is a well-known special case and is the simplest form of these methods. The biallelic markers of the present invention may be used in both parametnc and non- parametnc linkage analysis. Preferably biallelic markers may be used in non-parametnc methods which allow the mapping of genes involved in complex traits. The biallelic markers of the present invention may be used in both IBD- and IBS- methods to map genes affecting a complex trait. In such studies, taking advantage of the high density of biallelic markers, several adjacent biallelic marker loci may be pooled to achieve the efficiency attained by multi-allehc markers (Zhao et al , 1998). Population Association Studies The present invention comprises methods for detecting an association between the PG-3 gene and a detectable trait using the biallelic markers ofthe present invention. In one embodiment the present invention comprises methods to detect an association between a biallelic marker allele or a biallelic marker haplotype and a trait. Further, the invention comprises methods to identify a trait causing allele in linkage disequilibrium with any biallelic marker allele of the present invention. As described above, alternative approaches can be employed to perform association studies: genome -wide association studies, candidate region association studies and candidate gene association studies. In a preferred embodiment, the biallelic markers ofthe present invention are used to perform candidate gene association studies. The candidate gene analysis clearly provides a short-cut approach to the identification of genes and gene polymoφhisms related to a particular trait when some information concerning the biology ofthe trait is available. Further, the biallelic markers of the present invention may be incoφorated in any map of genetic markers ofthe human genome in order to perform genome-wide association studies. Methods to generate a high-density map of biallelic markers has been described in US Provisional Patent application serial number 60/082,614. The biallelic markers ofthe present invention may further be incoφorated in any map of a specific candidate region of the genome (a specific chromosome or a specific chromosomal segment for example). As mentioned above, association studies may be conducted within the general population and are not limited to studies performed on related individuals in affected families. Association studies are extremely valuable as they permit the analysis of sporadic or multifactor traits. Moreover, association studies represent a powerful method for fine-scale mapping enabling much finer mapping of trait causing alleles than linkage studies. Studies based on pedigrees often only narrow the location ofthe trait causing allele. Association studies using the biallelic markers of the present invention can therefore be used to refine the location of a trait causing allele in a candidate region identified by Linkage Analysis methods. Moreover, once a chromosome segment of interest has been identified, the presence of a candidate gene such as a candidate gene of the present invention, in the region of interest can provide a shortcut to the identification of the trait causing allele. Biallelic markers ofthe present invention can be used to demonsfrate that a candidate gene is associated with a trait. Such uses are specifically contemplated in the present invention. Determining The Frequency Of A Biallelic Marker Allele Or Of A Biallelic Marker Haplotype In A Population Association studies explore the relationships among frequencies for sets of alleles between loci. DETERMINING THE FREQUENCY OF AN ALLELE IN A POPULATION Allelic frequencies of the biallelic markers in a populations can be determined using one of the methods described above under the heading "Methods for genotyping an individual for biallelic markers", or any genotyping procedure suitable for this intended puφose. Genotyping pooled samples or individual samples can determine the frequency of a biallelic marker allele in a population. One way to reduce the number of genotypings required is to use pooled samples. A drawback in using pooled samples is in terms of accuracy and reproducibihty for determining accurate DNA concentrations m setting up the pools. Genotyping individual samples provides higher sensitivity, reproducibihty and accuracy and; is the preferred method used in the present invention. Preferably, each individual is genotyped separately and simple gene counting is applied to determine the frequency of an allele of a biallelic marker or of a genotype in a given population. The invention also relates to methods of estimating the frequency of an allele in a population comprising: a) genotyping individuals from said population for said biallelic marker according to the method ofthe present invention; b) determining the proportional representation of said biallelic marker in said population. In addition, the methods of estimating the frequency of an allele in a population ofthe invention encompass methods with any further limitation descnbed in this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or in any combination; optionally, the PG-3- related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A 1 to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic marker is one ofthe biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A5 and A8 to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A6 and A7, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum therewith; Optionally, the determination ofthe frequency of a biallelic marker allele in a population may be accomplished by determining the identity of the nucleotides for both copies of said biallelic marker present m the genome of each individual in said population and calculating the proportional representation of said nucleotide at said PG-3-related biallelic marker for the population; Optionally, the determination of the proportional representation may be accomplished by performing a genotyping method of the invention on a pooled biological sample deπved from a representative number of individuals, or each individual, in said population, and calculating the proportional amount of said nucleotide compared with the total. DETERMINING THE FREQUENCY OF A HAPLOTYPE IN A POPULATION The gametic phase of haplotypes is unknown when diploid individuals are heterozygous at more than one locus. Using genealogical information in families gametic phase can sometimes be inferred (Perhn et al, 1994). When no genealogical information is available different strategies may be used. One possibility is that the multiple-site heterozygous diploids can be eliminated from the analysis, keeping only the homozygotes and the single-site heterozygote individuals, but this approach might lead to a possible bias in the sample composition and the underestimation of low- frequency haplotypes. Another possibility is that single chromosomes can be studied independently, for example, by asymmetric PCR amplification (see Newton et al, 1989; Wu et al, 1989) or by isolation of single chromosome by limit dilution followed by PCR amplification (see Ruano et al, 1990). Further, a sample may be haplotyped for sufficiently close biallelic markers by double PCR amplification of specific alleles (Sarkar, G. and Sommer S. S., 1991). These approaches are not entirely satisfying either because of their technical complexity, the additional cost they entail, their lack of generalization at a large scale, or the possible biases they introduce. To overcome these difficulties, an algorithm to infer the phase of PCR-amphfied DNA genotypes introduced by Clark, A.G.(1990) may be used. Briefly, the principle is to start filling a preliminary list of haplotypes present in the sample by examining unambiguous individuals, that is, the complete homozygotes and the single-site heterozygotes. Then other individuals in the same sample are screened for the possible occurrence of previously recognized haplotypes. For each positive identification, the complementary haplotype is added to the list of recognized haplotypes, until the phase information for all individuals is either resolved or identified as unresolved. This method assigns a single haplotype to each multiheterozygous individual, whereas several haplotypes are possible when there are more than one heterozygous site. Alternatively, one can use methods estimating haplotype frequencies in a population without assigning haplotypes to each individual. Preferably, a method based on an expectation-maximization (EM) algoπthm (Dempster et al , 1977) leading to maximum-likelihood estimates of haplotype frequencies under the assumption of Hardy- Wemberg proportions (random mating) is used (see Excoffier L. and Slatkm M., 1995). The EM algorithm is a generalized iterative maximum-likelihood approach to estimation that is useful when data are ambiguous and/or incomplete. The EM algonthm is used to resolve heterozygotes into haplotypes. Haplotype estimations are further descnbed below under the heading "Statistical Methods." Any other method known in the art to determine or to estimate the frequency of a haplotype in a population may be used. The invention also encompasses methods of estimating the frequency of a haplotype for a set of biallelic markers m a population, compnsmg the steps of: a) genotyping at least one PG-3- related biallelic marker according to a method ofthe invention for each individual in said population; b) genotyping a second biallelic marker by determining the identity ofthe nucleotides at said second biallelic marker for both copies of said second biallelic marker present in the genome of each individual in said population; and c) applying a haplotype determination method to the identities of the nucleotides determined in steps a) and b) to obtain an estimate of said frequency. In addition, the methods of estimating the frequency of a haplotype of the invention encompass methods with any further limitation descnbed in this disclosure, or those following, alone or in any combination: optionally, said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A5 and A8 to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A6 and A7, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; Optionally, said haplotype 5 determination method is performed by asymmetric PCR amplification, double PCR amplification of specific alleles, the Clark algorithm, or an expectation-maximization algorithm. Linkage Disequilibrium Analysis Linkage disequilibrium is the non-random association of alleles at two or more loci and represents a powerful tool for mapping genes involved in disease traits (see Ajioka R.S. et al, 10 1997). Biallelic markers, because they are densely spaced in the human genome and can be genotyped in greater numbers than other types of genetic markers (such as RFLP or VNTR markers), are particularly useful in genetic analysis based on linkage disequilibrium. When a disease mutation is first introduced into a population (by a new mutation or the immigration of a mutation carrier), it necessarily resides on a single chromosome and thus on a 15 single "background" or "ancestral" haplotype of linked markers. Consequently, there is complete disequilibrium between these markers and the disease mutation: one finds the disease mutation only in the presence of a specific set of marker alleles. Through subsequent generations recombination events occur between the disease mutation and these marker polymoφhisms, and the disequilibrium gradually dissipates. The pace of this dissipation is a function ofthe recombination frequency, so 20 the markers closest to the disease gene will manifest higher levels of disequilibrium than those that are further away. When not broken up by recombination, "ancestral" haplotypes and linkage disequilibrium between marker alleles at different loci can be tracked not only through pedigrees but also through populations. Linkage disequilibrium is usually seen as an association between one specific allele at one locus and another specific allele at a second locus. 25 The pattern or curve of disequilibrium between disease and marker loci is expected to exhibit a maximum that occurs at the disease locus. Consequently, the amount of linkage disequilibrium between a disease allele and closely linked genetic markers may yield valuable information regarding the location of the disease gene. For fine-scale mapping of a disease locus, it is useful to have some knowledge ofthe patterns of linkage disequilibrium that exist between 30 markers in the studied region. As mentioned above the mapping resolution achieved through the analysis of linkage disequilibrium is much higher than that of linkage studies. The high density of biallelic markers combined with linkage disequilibrium analysis provides powerful tools for fine- scale mapping. Different methods to calculate linkage disequilibrium are described below under the heading "Statistical Methods". 35 Population-Based Case-Control Studies Of Trait-Marker Associations As mentioned above, the occurrence of pairs of specific alleles at different loci on the same chromosome is not random and the deviation from random is called linkage disequilibrium. Association studies focus on population frequencies and rely on the phenomenon of linkage disequilibrium. If a specific allele in a given gene is directly involved in causing a particular trait, its frequency will be statistically increased m an affected (trait positive) population, when compared to the frequency in a trait negative population or m a random control population. As a consequence of the existence of linkage disequilibrium, the frequency of all other alleles present in the haplotype carrying the trait-causmg allele will also be increased in trait positive individuals compared to trait negative individuals or random controls. Therefore, association between the trait and any allele (specifically a biallelic marker allele) in linkage disequilibrium with the trait-causing allele will suffice to suggest the presence of a trait-related gene m that particular region. Case-control populations can be genotyped for biallelic markers to identify associations that narrowly locate a trait causing allele. As any marker in linkage disequihbnum with one given marker associated with a trait will be associated with the trait. Linkage disequilibrium allows the relative frequencies in case-control populations of a limited number of genetic polymoφhisms (specifically biallelic markers) to be analyzed as an alternative to screening all possible functional polymoφhisms m order to find trait-causing alleles. Association studies compare the frequency of marker alleles in unrelated case-control populations, and represent powerful tools for the dissection of complex traits. CASE-CONTROL POPULATIONS (INCLUSION CRITERIA) Population-based association studies do not concern familial inheritance but compare the prevalence of a particular genetic marker, or a set of markers, m case-control populations. They are case-control studies based on comparison of unrelated case (affected or trait positive) individuals and unrelated control (unaffected, trait negative or random) individuals. Preferably the control group is composed of unaffected or trait negative individuals. Further, the control group is ethnically matched to the case population. Moreover, the control group is preferably matched to the case-population for the main known confusion factor for the trait under study (for example age- matched for an age-dependent trait). Ideally, individuals in the two samples are paired m such a way that they are expected to differ only in their disease status. The terms "trait positive population", "case population" and "affected population" are used interchangeably herein. An important step in the dissection of complex traits using association studies is the choice of case-control populations (see Lander and Schork, 1994). A major step in the choice of case- control populations is the clinical definition of a given trait or phenotype. Any genetic trait may be analyzed by the association method proposed here by carefully selecting the individuals to be included in the trait positive and trait negative phenotypic groups. Four cπtena are often useful: clinical phenotype, age at onset, family history and seventy. The selection procedure for continuous or quantitative traits (such as blood pressure for example) involves selecting individuals at opposite ends ofthe phenotype distnbution ofthe trait under study, so as to include in these trait positive and trait negative populations individuals with non-overlapping phenotypes. Preferably, case-control populations consist of phenotypically homogeneous populations. Trait positive and frait negative populations consist of phenotypically uniform populations of individuals representing each between 1 and 98%, preferably between 1 and 80%, more preferably between 1 and 50%, and more preferably between 1 and 30%, most preferably between 1 and 20% ofthe total population under study, and preferably selected among individuals exhibiting non-overlapping phenotypes. The clearer the difference between the two frait phenotypes, the greater the probability of detecting an association with biallelic markers. The selection of those drastically different but relatively uniform phenotypes enables efficient comparisons in association studies and the possible detection of marked differences at the genetic level, provided that the sample sizes of the populations under study are significant enough. In preferred embodiments, a first group of between 50 and 300 trait positive individuals, preferably about 100 individuals, are recruited according to their phenotypes. A similar number of control individuals are included in such studies. ASSOCIATION ANALYSIS The invention also comprises methods of detecting an association between a genotype and a phenotype, comprising the steps of: a) determining the frequency of at least one PG-3-related biallelic marker in a frait positive population according to a genotyping method of the invention; b) determining the frequency of said PG-3 -related biallelic marker in a control population according to a genotyping method ofthe invention; and c) determining whether a statistically significant association exists between said genotype and said phenotype. In addition, the methods of detecting an association between a genotype and a phenotype ofthe invention encompass methods with any further limitation described in this disclosure, or those following, specified alone or in any combination: optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A 1 to A5 and A8 to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A6 and A7, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; Optionally, said control population may be a trait negative population, or a random population; Optionally, each of said genotyping steps a) and b) may be performed on a pooled biological sample derived from each of said populations; Optionally, each of said genotyping of steps a) and b) is performed separately on biological samples derived from each individual in said population or a subsample thereof; Optionally, said trait is cancer susceptibility. The general strategy to perform association studies using biallelic markers derived from a region carrying a candidate gene is to scan two groups of individuals (case-control populations) in order to measure and statistically compare the allele frequencies of the biallelic markers ofthe present invention in both groups. If a statistically significant association with a trait is identified for at least one or more of the analyzed biallelic markers, one can assume that: either the associated allele is directly responsible for causing the trait (i.e. the associated allele is the trait causing allele), or more likely the associated allele is in linkage disequilibrium with the trait causing allele. The specific characteristics ofthe associated allele with respect to the candidate gene function usually give further insight into the relationship between the associated allele and the frait (causal or in linkage disequilibrium). If the evidence indicates that the associated allele within the candidate gene is most probably not the trait causing allele but is in linkage disequilibrium with the real frait causing allele, then the trait causing allele can be found by sequencing the vicinity of the associated marker, and performing further association studies with the polymoφhisms that are revealed in an iterative manner. Association studies are usually run in two successive steps. In a first phase, the frequencies of a reduced number of biallelic markers from the candidate gene are determined in the trait positive and control populations. In a second phase of the analysis, the position of the genetic loci responsible for the given trait is further refined using a higher density of markers from the relevant region. However, if the candidate gene under study is relatively small in length, as is the case for PG-3, a single phase may be sufficient to establish significant associations. HAPLOTYPE ANALYSIS As described above, when a chromosome carrying a disease allele first appears in a population as a result of either mutation or migration, the mutant allele necessarily resides on a chromosome having a set of linked markers: the ancestral haplotype. This haplotype can be tracked through populations and its statistical association with a given trait can be analyzed. Complementing single point (allelic) association studies with multi-point association studies also called haplotype studies increases the statistical power of association studies. Thus, a haplotype association study allows one to define the frequency and the type of the ancesfral carrier haplotype. A haplotype analysis is important in that it increases the statistical power of an analysis involving individual markers. In a first stage of a haplotype frequency analysis, the frequency of the possible haplotypes based on various combinations ofthe identified biallelic markers ofthe invention is determined. The haplotype frequency is then compared for distinct populations of trait positive and control individuals. The number of trait positive individuals, which should be, subjected to this analysis to obtain statistically significant results usually ranges between 30 and 300, with a preferred number of individuals ranging between 50 and 150. The same considerations apply to the number of unaffected individuals (or random control) used in the study. The results of this first analysis provide haplotype frequencies in case-control populations, for each evaluated haplotype frequency a p-value and an odd ratio are calculated. If a statistically significant association is found the relative risk for an individual carrying the given haplotype of being affected with the trait under study can be approximated. An additional embodiment ofthe present invention encompasses methods of detecting an association between a haplotype and a phenotype, comprising the steps of: a) estimating the frequency of at least one haplotype in a trait positive population, according to a method of the invention for estimating the frequency of a haplotype; b) estimating the frequency of said haplotype in a control population, according to a method ofthe invention for estimating the frequency of a haplotype; and c) determining whether a statistically significant association exists between said haplotype and said phenotype. In addition, the methods of detecting an association between a haplotype and a phenotype of the invention encompass methods with any further limitation described in this disclosure, or those following: optionally, said PG-3 -related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A5 and A8 to A80, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; optionally, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A6 and A7, and the complements thereof, or optionally the biallelic markers in linkage disequilibrium therewith; Optionally, said control population is a trait negative population, or a random population. Optionally, said method comprises the additional steps of determining the phenotype in said trait positive and said control populations prior to step c); optionally, said trait is cancer susceptibility. INTERACTION ANALYSIS The biallelic markers ofthe present invention may also be used to identify patterns of biallelic markers associated with detectable traits resulting from polygenic interactions. The analysis of genetic interaction between alleles at unlinked loci requires individual genotyping using the techniques described herein. The analysis of allelic interaction among a selected set of biallelic markers with an appropriate level of statistical significance can be considered as a haplotype analysis. Interaction analysis consists in stratifying the case-control populations with respect to a given haplotype for the first loci and performing a haplotype analysis with the second loci with each subpopulation. Statistical methods used in association studies are further described below. Testing For Linkage In The Presence Of Association The biallelic markers of the present invention may further be used in TDT (transmission/disequilibrium test). TDT tests for both linkage and association and is not affected by population stratification. TDT requires data for affected individuals and their parents or data from unaffected sibs instead of from parents (see Spielmann S. et al, 1993; Schaid D.J. et al, 1996, Spielmann S. and Ewens W.J., 1998). Such combined tests generally reduce the false - positive errors produced by separate analyses. STATISTICAL METHODS In general, any method known in the art to test whether a trait and a genotype show a statistically significant correlation may be used. 1) Methods In Linkage Analysis Statistical methods and computer programs useful for linkage analysis are well-known to those skilled in the art (see Terwilliger J.D. and Ott J., 1994; Ott J., 1991). 2) Methods To Estimate Haplotype Frequencies In A Population As described above, when genotypes are scored, it is often not possible to distinguish heterozygotes so that haplotype frequencies cannot be easily inferred. When the gametic phase is not known, haplotype frequencies can be estimated from the multilocus genotypic data. Any method known to person skilled in the art can be used to estimate haplotype frequencies (see Lange K., 1997; Weir, B.S., 1996) Preferably, maximum-likelihood haplotype frequencies are computed using an Expectation- Maximization (EM) algorithm (see Dempster et al, 1977; Excoffier L. and Slatkin M., 1995). This procedure is an iterative process aiming at obtaining maximum-likelihood estimates of haplotype frequencies from multi-locus genotype data when the gametic phase is unknown. Haplotype estimations are usually performed by applying the EM algorithm using for example the EM-HAPLO program (Hawley M. E. et al, 1994) or the Arlequin program (Schneider et al, 1997). The EM algorithm is a generalized iterative maximum likelihood approach to estimation and is briefly described below. Please note that in the present section, "Methods To Estimate Haplotype Frequencies In A Population, ", phenotypes will refer to multi-locus genotypes with unknown haplotypic phase. Genotypes will refer to mutli-locus genotypes with known haplotypic phase. Suppose one has a sample of N unrelated individuals typed for K markers. The data observed are the unknown-phase K-locus phenotypes that can be categorized with F different phenotypes. Further, suppose that we have H possible haplotypes (in the case of K biallelic markers, we have for the maximum number of possible haplotypes H= 2 ). For phenotype j with cj possible genotypes, we have: P j = ^ P(genotype(i)) = ^ P(h k , h, ). Equation 1 ι=l ι=l Here, P j is the probability of they ' " 1 phenotype, and is the probability ofthe i* genotype composed of haplotypes h k and h Under random mating (i.e. Hardy- Weinberg Equilibrium), Pflik i) is expressed as: P(h k , h,) = P(h k Ϋ for h k = h, , and P(h k ,h,) = 2P(h k )P(h, ) for h k ≠ h, . Equation 2 The E-M algorithm is composed ofthe following steps: First, the genotype frequencies are estimated from a set of initial values of haplotype frequencies. These haplotype frequencies are denoted P, (0) , P 2 <0) , P 3 (0) ,.. -, P (0) - The initial values for the haplotype frequencies may be obtained from a random number generator or m some other way well known in the art. This step is referred to the Expectation step. The next step in the method, called the Maximization step, consists of using the estimates for the genotype frequencies to re-calculate the haplotype frequencies. The first iteration haplotype frequency estimates are denoted by P 2 (l) , P 3 <1> ,... , P H ' ) - In general, the Expectation step at the s 0, iteration consists of calculating the probability of placing each phenotype into the different possible genotypes based on the haplotype frequencies ofthe previous iteration: p(h k ,h, Equation 3 where n, is the number of individuals with they* phenotype and P (h k , h t ) (s) is the probability of genotype Λ fo /z / in phenotypey. In the Maximization step, which is equivalent to the gene-counting method (Smith, 1957), the haplotype frequencies are re-estimated based on the genotype estimates: Pt S+X) = Jl έ<WA* ) (,) - Equatιon 4 1 y=l ,=1 Here, δ„ is an indicator variable which counts the number of occurrences that haplotype t is present m ι th genotype; it takes on values 0, 1, and 2. The E-M iterations cease when the following cntenon has been reached. Using Maximum Likelihood Estimation (MLE) theory, one assumes that the phenotypes^ are distπbuted multinomially. At each iteration s, one can compute the likelihood function L. Convergence is achieved when the difference ofthe log-hkehood between two consecutive iterations is less than some small number, preferably 10 "7 . 3) Methods To Calculate Linkage Disequilibrium Between Markers A number of methods can be used to calculate linkage disequihbnum between any two genetic positions, in practice linkage disequihbnum is measured by applying a statistical association test to haplotype data taken from a population. Linkage disequilibrium between any pair of biallelic markers compπsing at least one ofthe biallelic markers ofthe present invention (M„ M j ) having alleles (a/b,) at marker M, and alleles (a j /b j ) at marker M j can be calculated for every allele combination (a,^ a,,^ b„a j and b„b j ), according to the Piazza formula: Δ ai a j = Vθ4 - V (Θ4 + Θ3) (Θ4 +Θ2), where: Θ4= - - = frequency of genotypes not having allele a, at M, and not having allele } at M j Θ3= - + = frequency of genotypes not having allele a, at M, and having allele a, at M, Θ2= + - = frequency of genotypes having allele a, at M, and not having allele a, at M, Linkage disequihbnum (LD) between pairs of biallelic markers (M„ M j ) can also be calculated for every allele combination (ai.aj. ai.bj.b u a, andb„b,), according to the maximum- likelihood estimate (MLE) for delta (the composite genotypic disequilibrium coefficient), as described by Weir (Weir B. S., 1996). The MLE for the composite linkage disequilibrium is: D aιaj = (2n, + n 2 + n 3 + n^/ZJ/N - 2(pr(a,). pr(a,)) Where n, = Σ phenotype (a/a„ a/a,), n 2 = Σ phenotype (a,/a„ a b,), n 3 = Σ phenotype (a,/b„ a/a,), n4= Σ phenotype (aj/b,, a,/bj) and N is the number of individuals in the sample. This formula allows linkage disequilibrium between alleles to be estimated when only genotype, and not haplotype, data are available. Another means of calculating the linkage disequilibrium between markers is as follows. For a couple of biallelic markers, M, (a/b,) and M j (a b j ), fitting the Hardy- Weinberg equilibrium, one can estimate the four possible haplotype frequencies in a given population according to the approach described above. The estimation of gametic disequilibrium between ai and aj is simply: D aiaj = pr(haplotype(a aj)) - pr(ai).pr(aj). Where pr(a) is the probability of allele α,- and (aj) is the probability of allele α, and where pr(haplotype (a » a ) is estimated as in Equation 3 above. For a couple of biallelic marker only one measure of disequilibrium is necessary to describe the association between M, and M } . Then a normalized value ofthe above is calculated as follows: D' a ,a j = D aιaj / max (-pr(a,). pr(a j ) , -pr(b,). pr(b j )) with D aιaj <0 D' aιaj = Da iaj / max (pr(b,). pr(a j ) , pr(a,). pr(b j )) with D aιaj >0 The skilled person will readily appreciate that other linkage disequilibrium calculation methods can be used. Linkage disequilibrium among a set of biallelic markers having an adequate heterozygosity rate can be determined by genotyping between 50 and 1000 unrelated individuals, preferably between 75 and 200, more preferably around 100. 4) Testing For Association Methods for determining the statistical significance of a correlation between a phenotype and a genotype, in this case an allele at a biallelic marker or a haplotype made up of such alleles, may be determined by any statistical test known in the art and with any accepted threshold of statistical significance being required. The application of particular methods and thresholds of significance are well with in the skill of the ordinary practitioner ofthe art. Testing for association is performed by determining the frequency of a biallelic marker allele in case and control populations and comparing these frequencies with a statistical test to determine if their is a statistically significant difference in frequency which would indicate a correlation between the trait and the biallelic marker allele under study. Similarly, a haplotype analysis is performed by estimating the frequencies of all possible haplotypes for a given set of biallelic markers in case and control populations, and comparing these frequencies with a statistical test to determine if their is a statistically significant correlation between the haplotype and the phenotype (trait) under study. Any statistical tool useful to test for a statistically significant association between a genotype and a phenotype may be used. Preferably the statistical test employed is a chi-square test with one degree of freedom. A P-value is calculated (the P-value is the probability that a statistic as large or larger than the observed one would occur by chance). STATISTICAL SIGNIFICANCE In preferred embodiments, significance for diagnosis puφoses, either as a positive basis for further diagnostic tests or as a preliminary starting point for early preventive therapy, the p value related to a biallelic marker association is preferably about 1 x 10 "2 or less, more preferably about 1 x 10 "4 or less, for a single biallelic marker analysis and about 1 x 10° or less, still more preferably 1 x 10 "6 or less and most preferably of about 1 x 10 "8 or less, for a haplotype analysis involving two or more markers. These values are believed to be applicable to any association studies involving single or multiple marker combinations. The skilled person can use the range of values set forth above as a starting point in order to carry out association studies with biallelic markers ofthe present invention. In doing so, significant associations between the biallelic markers of the present invention and a trait can be revealed and used for diagnosis and drug screening puφoses. PHENOTYPIC PERMUTATION In order to confirm the statistical significance of the first stage haplotype analysis described above, it might be suitable to perform further analyses in which genotyping data from case-control individuals are pooled and randomized with respect to the trait phenotype. Each individual genotyping data is randomly allocated to two groups, which contain the same number of individuals as the case-control populations used to compile the data obtained in the first stage. A second stage haplotype analysis is preferably run on these artificial groups, preferably for the markers included in the haplotype of the first stage analysis showing the highest relative risk coefficient. This experiment is reiterated preferably at least between 100 and 10000 times. The repeated iterations allow the determination ofthe probability to obtain the tested haplotype by chance. ASSESSMENT OF STATISTICAL ASSOCIATION To address the problem of false positives similar analysis may be performed with the same case-control populations in random genomic regions. Results in random regions and the candidate region are compared as described in a co-pending US Provisional Patent Application entitled "Methods, Software And Apparati For Identifying Genomic Regions Harboring A Gene Associated With A Detectable Trait," U.S. Serial Number 60/107,986, filed November 10, 1998, and a second U.S. Provisional Patent Application also entitled "Methods, Software And Apparati For Identifying Genomic Regions Harboring A Gene Associated With A Detectable Trait," U.S. Serial Number 60/140,785, filed June 23, 1999. 5) Evaluation Of Risk Factors The association between a risk factor (in genetic epidemiology the nsk factor is the presence or the absence of a certain allele or haplotype at marker loci) and a disease is measured by the odds ratio (OR) and by the relative risk (RR). If P(R + ) is the probability of developing the disease for individuals with R and P(R " ) is the probability for individuals without the πsk factor, then the relative nsk is simply the ratio ofthe two probabilities, that is: RR= P(R + )/P(R " ) In case-control studies, direct measures ofthe relative risk cannot be obtained because of the sampling design. However, the odds ratio allows a good approximation of the relative nsk for low-incidence diseases and can be calculated: F + OR l - F + (1 - F-) OR= (F + /(l-F + ))/(F7(l-F-)) F + is the frequency of the exposure to the nsk factor in cases and F is the frequency ofthe exposure to the πsk factor in controls. F + and F " are calculated using the allelic or haplotype frequencies ofthe study and further depend on the underlying genetic model (dominant, recessive, additive...). One can further estimate the attnbutable risk (AR) which descnbes the proportion of individuals in a population exhibiting a trait due to a given πsk factor. This measure is important in quantifying the role of a specific factor in disease etiology and m terms of the public health impact of a risk factor. The public health relevance of this measure lies in estimating the proportion of cases of disease m the population that could be prevented if the exposure of interest were absent. AR is determined as follows: AR = P E (RR-1) / (P E (RR-1)+1) AR is the nsk attributable to a biallelic marker allele or a biallelic marker haplotype. P E is the frequency of exposure to an allele or a haplotype within the population at large, and RR is the relative risk which, is approximated with the odds ratio when the trait under study has a relatively low incidence m the general population. IDENTIFICATION OF BIALLELIC MARKERS IN LINKAGE DISEQUILIBRIUM WITH THE BIALLELIC MARKERS OF THE INVENTION Once a first biallelic marker has been identified in a genomic region of interest, the practitioner of ordinary skill in the art, using the teachings ofthe present invention, can easily identify additional biallelic markers in linkage disequihbnum with this first marker. As mentioned before, any marker in linkage disequihbnum with a first marker associated with a trait will be associated with the trait. Therefore, once an association has been demonstrated between a given biallelic marker and a trait, the discovery of additional biallelic markers associated with this trait is of great interest in order to increase the density of biallelic markers in this particular region. The causal gene or mutation will be found in the vicinity of the marker or set of markers showing the highest correlation with the frait. Identification of additional markers in linkage disequilibrium with a given marker involves: (a) amplifying a genomic fragment comprising a first biallelic marker from a plurality of individuals; (b) identifying of second biallelic markers in the genomic region harboring said first biallelic marker; (c) conducting a linkage disequilibrium analysis between said first biallelic marker and second biallelic markers; and (d) selecting said second biallelic markers as being in linkage disequilibrium with said first marker. Subcombinations comprising steps (b) and (c) are also contemplated. Methods to identify biallelic markers and to conduct linkage disequilibrium analysis are described herein and can be carried out by the skilled person without undue experimentation. The present invention then also concerns biallelic markers which are in linkage disequilibrium with the biallelic markers Al to A80 and which are expected to present similar characteristics in terms of their respective association with a given trait. IDENTIFICATION OF FUNCTIONAL MUTATIONS Mutations in the PG-3 gene which are responsible for a detectable phenotype or trait may be identified by comparing the sequences ofthe PG-3 gene from trait positive and control individuals. Once a positive association is confirmed with a biallelic marker ofthe present invention, the identified locus can be scanned for mutations. In a preferred embodiment, functional regions such as exons and splice sites, promoters and other regulatory regions of the PG-3 gene are scanned for mutations. In a preferred embodiment the sequence of the PG-3 gene is compared in frait positive and control individuals. Preferably, trait positive individuals carry the haplotype shown to be associated with the trait and trait negative individuals do not carry the haplotype or allele associated with the trait. The detectable trait or phenotype may comprise a variety of manifestations of altered PG-3 function. The mutation detection procedure is essentially similar to that used for biallelic marker identification. The method used to detect such mutations generally comprises the following steps: - amplification of a region ofthe PG-3 gene comprising a biallelic marker or a group of biallelic markers associated with the trait from DNA samples of frait positive patients and trait- negative controls; - sequencing ofthe amplified region; - comparison of DNA sequences from trait positive and control individuals; - determination of mutations specific to trait-positive patients. In one embodiment, said biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof. It is preferred that candidate polymoφhisms be then verified by screening a larger population of cases and controls by means of any genotyping procedure such as those described herein, preferably using a microsequencing technique in an individual test format. Polymoφhisms are considered as candidate mutations when present in cases and controls at frequencies compatible with the expected association results. Polymoφhisms are considered as candidate "trait-causing" mutations when they exhibit a statistically significant correlation with the detectable phenotype. RECOMBINANT VECTORS The term "vector" is used herein to designate either a circular or a linear DNA or RNA molecule, which is either double-stranded or single-stranded, and which comprise at least one polynucleotide of interest that is sought to be transferred in a cell host or in a unicellular or multicellular host organism. The present invention encompasses a family of recombinant vectors that comprise a regulatory polynucleotide derived from the PG-3 genomic sequence, and/or a coding polynucleotide from either the PG-3 genomic sequence or the cDNA sequence. Generally, a recombinant vector ofthe invention may comprise any ofthe polynucleotides described herein, including regulatory sequences, coding sequences and polynucleotide constructs, as well as any PG-3 primer or probe as defined above. More particularly, the recombinant vectors of the present invention can comprise any ofthe polynucleotides described in the "Genomic Sequences Of The PG3 Gene" section, the "PG-3 cDNA Sequences" section, the "Coding Regions" section, the "Polynucleotide constructs" section, and the "Oligonucleotide Probes And Primers" section. In a first preferred embodiment, a recombinant vector ofthe invention is used to amplify the inserted polynucleotide derived from a PG-3 genomic sequence of SEQ ID No 1 or a PG-3 cDNA, for example the cDNA of SEQ ID No 2 in a suitable cell host, this polynucleotide being amplified at every time that the recombinant vector replicates. A second preferred embodiment ofthe recombinant vectors according to the invention comprises expression vectors comprising either a regulatory polynucleotide or a coding nucleic acid ofthe invention, or both. Within certain embodiments, expression vectors are employed to express the PG-3 polypeptide, which can then be purified and, for example be used in ligand screening assays or as an immunogen in order to raise specific antibodies directed against the PG-3 protein. In other embodiments, the expression vectors are used for constructing transgenic animals and also for gene therapy. Expression requires that appropriate signals are provided in the vectors, said signals including various regulatory elements, such as enhancers/promoters from both viral and mammalian sources that drive expression ofthe genes of interest in host cells. Dominant drug selection markers for establishing permanent, stable cell clones expressing the products are generally included in the expression vectors ofthe invention, as they are elements that link expression ofthe drug selection markers to expression ofthe polypeptide. More particularly, the present invention relates to expression vectors which include nucleic acids encoding a PG-3 protein, preferably the PG-3 protein ofthe amino acid sequence of SEQ ID No 3 or variants or fragments thereof. The invention also pertains to a recombinant expression vector useful for the expression of the PG-3 coding sequence, wherein said vector comprises a nucleic acid of SEQ ID No 2. Recombinant vectors comprising a nucleic acid containing a PG-3-related biallelic marker are also part ofthe invention. In a preferred embodiment, said biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof. Some of the elements which can be found in the vectors ofthe present invention are described in further detail in the following sections. The present invention also encompasses primary, secondary, and immortalized homologously recombinant host cells of vertebrate origin, preferably mammalian origin and particularly human origin, that have been engineered to: a) insert exogenous (heterologous) polynucleotides into the endogenous chromosomal DNA of a targeted gene, b) delete endogenous chromosomal DNA, and/or c) replace endogenous chromosomal DNA with exogenous polynucleotides. Insertions, deletions, and/or replacements of polynucleotide sequences may be to the coding sequences of the targeted gene and/or to regulatory regions, such as promoter and enhancer sequences, operably associated with the targeted gene. The present invention further relates to a method of making a homologously recombinant host cell in vitro or in vivo, wherein the expression of a targeted gene not normally expressed in the cell is altered. Preferably the alteration causes expression ofthe targeted gene under normal growth conditions or under conditions suitable for producing the polypeptide encoded by the targeted gene. The method comprises the steps of: (a) fransfecting the cell in vitro or in vivo with a polynucleotide construct, the polynucleotide construct comprising; (i) a targeting sequence; (ii) a regulatory sequence and/or a coding sequence; and (iii) an unpaired splice donor site, if necessary, thereby producing a transfected cell; and (b) maintaining the transfected cell in vitro or in vivo under conditions appropriate for homologous recombination. The present invention further relates to a method of altering the expression of a targeted gene in a cell in vitro or in vivo wherein the gene is not normally expressed in the cell, comprising the steps of: (a) fransfecting the cell in vitro or in vivo with a a polynucleotide construct, the a polynucleotide construct comprising: (i) a targeting sequence; (ii) a regulatory sequence and/or a coding sequence; and (iii) an unpaired splice donor site, if necessary, thereby producing a transfected cell; and (b) maintaining the transfected cell in vitro or in vivo under conditions appropriate for homologous recombination, thereby producing a homologously recombinant cell; and (c) maintaining the homologously recombinant cell in vitro or in vivo under conditions appropriate for expression ofthe gene. The present invention further relates to a method of making a polypeptide ofthe present invention by altering the expression of a targeted endogenous gene in a cell in vitro or in vivo wherein the gene is not normally expressed in the cell, comprising the steps of: a) fransfecting the cell in vitro with a a polynucleotide construct, the a polynucleotide construct comprising: (i) a targeting sequence; (ii) a regulatory sequence and/or a coding sequence; and (iii) an unpaired splice donor site, if necessary, thereby producing a transfected cell; (b) maintaining the transfected cell in vitro or in vivo under conditions appropriate for homologous recombination, thereby producing a homologously recombinant cell; and c) maintaining the homologously recombinant cell in vitro or in vivo under conditions appropriate for expression ofthe gene thereby making the polypeptide. The present invention further relates to a polynucleotide construct which alters the expression of a targeted gene in a cell type in which the gene is not normally expressed. This occurs when the a polynucleotide construct is inserted into the chromosomal DNA of the target cell, wherein the a polynucleotide construct comprises: a) a targeting sequence; b) a regulatory sequence and/or coding sequence; and c) an unpaired splice-donor site, if necessary. Further included are a polynucleotide constructs, as described above, wherein the construct further comprises a polynucleotide which encodes a polypeptide and is in-frame with the targeted endogenous gene after homologous recombination with chromosomal DNA. The compositions may be produced, and methods performed, by techniques known in the art, such as those described in U.S. Patent Nos: 6,054,288; 6,048,729; 6,048,724; 6,048,524; 5,994,127; 5,968,502; 5,965,125; 5,869,239; 5,817,789; 5,783,385; 5,733,761; 5,641,670; 5,580,734 ; International Publication Nos:W096/29411, WO 94/12650; and scientific articles including Roller et α/.,1989. 1. General features of the expression vectors of the invention A recombinant vector according to the invention comprises, but is not limited to, a YAC (Yeast Artificial Chromosome), a BAC (Bacterial Artificial Chromosome), a phage, a phagemid, a cosmid, a plasmid or even a linear DNA molecule which may consist of a chromosomal, non- chromosomal, semi-synthetic and synthetic DNA. Such a recombinant vector can comprise a transcriptional unit comprising an assembly of: (1) a genetic element or elements having a regulatory role in gene expression, for example promoters or enhancers. Enhancers are cis-acting elements of DNA, usually from about 10 to 300 bp in length that act on the promoter to increase the transcription. (2) a structural or coding sequence which is transcribed into mRNA and eventually translated into a polypeptide, said structural or coding sequence being operably linked to the regulatory elements described in (1); and (3) appropriate transcription initiation and termination sequences. Structural units intended for use in yeast or eukaryotic expression systems preferably include a leader sequence enabling extracellular secretion of translated protein by a host cell. Alternatively, when a recombinant protein is expressed without a leader or transport sequence, it may include a N-terminal residue. This residue may or may not be subsequently cleaved from the expressed recombinant protein to provide a final product. Generally, recombinant expression vectors will include origins of replication, selectable markers permitting transformation ofthe host cell, and a promoter derived from a highly expressed gene to direct transcription of a downstream structural sequence. The heterologous structural sequence is assembled in appropriate phase with translation initiation and termination sequences, and preferably a leader sequence capable of directing secretion of the translated protein into the periplasmic space or the extracellular medium. In a specific embodiment wherein the vector is adapted for transfecting and expressing desired sequences in mammalian host cells, preferred vectors will comprise an origin of replication in the desired host, a suitable promoter and enhancer, and also any necessary ribosome binding sites, polyadenylation signal, splice donor and acceptor sites, transcriptional termination sequences, and 5'-flanking non-transcribed sequences. DNA sequences derived from the SV40 viral genome, for example SV40 origin, early promoter, enhancer, splice and polyadenylation signals may be used to provide the required non-transcribed genetic elements. The in vivo expression of a PG-3 polypeptide of SEQ ID No 3 or fragments or variants thereof may be useful in order to correct a genetic defect related to the expression ofthe native gene in a host organism or to the production of a biologically inactive PG-3 protein. Consequently, the present invention also deals with recombinant expression vectors mainly designed for the in vivo production ofthe PG-3 polypeptide of SEQ ID No 3 or fragments or variants thereof by the introduction ofthe appropriate genetic material in the organism ofthe patient to be treated. This genetic material may be introduced in vitro in a cell that has been previously extracted from the organism, the modified cell being subsequently reinfroduced in the said organism, directly in vivo into the appropriate tissue. 2. Regulatory Elements PROMOTERS The suitable promoter regions used in the expression vectors according to the present invention are chosen taking into account the cell host in which the heterologous gene has to be expressed. The particular promoter employed to confrol the expression of a nucleic acid sequence of interest is not believed to be important, so long as it is capable of directing the expression of the nucleic acid in the targeted cell. Thus, where a human cell is targeted, it is preferable to position the nucleic acid coding region adjacent to and under the control of a promoter that is capable of being expressed in a human cell, such as, for example, a human or a viral promoter. A suitable promoter may be heterologous with respect to the nucleic acid for which it controls the expression or alternatively can be endogenous to the native polynucleotide containing the coding sequence to be expressed. Additionally, the promoter is generally heterologous with respect to the recombinant vector sequences within which the construct promoter/coding sequence has been inserted. Promoter regions can be selected from any desired gene using, for example, CAT (chloramphenicol transferase) vectors and more preferably pKK232-8 and pCM7 vectors. Preferred bacterial promoters are the Lad, LacZ, the T3 or T7 bacteriophage RNA polymerase promoters, the gpt, lambda PR, PL and tip promoters (EP 0036776), the polyhedrin promoter, or the plO protein promoter from baculovirus (Kit Novagen) (Smith et al, 1983; O'Reilly et al, 1992), the lambda PR promoter or also the trc promoter. Eukaryotic promoters include CMV immediate early, HSV thymidine kinase, early and late SV40, LTRs from refrovirus, and mouse metallothionein-L. Selection of a convenient vector and promoter is well within the level of ordinary skill in the art. The choice of a promoter is well within the ability of a person skilled in the field of genetic egineering. For example, one may refer to the book of Sambrook et α/.(1989) or also to the procedures described by Fuller et α/.(1996). OTHER REGULATORY ELEMENTS Where a cDNA insert is employed, one will typically desire to include a polyadenylation signal to effect proper polyadenylation ofthe gene transcript. The nature of the polyadenylation signal is not believed to be crucial to the successful practice of the invention, and any such sequence may be employed such as human growth hormone and SV40 polyadenylation signals. Also contemplated as an element ofthe expression cassette is a terminator. These elements can serve to enhance message levels and to minimize read through from the cassette into other sequences. 3. Selectable Markers Such markers would confer an identifiable change to the cell permitting easy identification of cells containing the expression construct. The selectable marker genes for selection of transformed host cells are preferably dihydrofolate reductase or neomycin resistance for eukaryotic cell culture, TRPl for S. cerevisiae or tetracychne, rifampicin or ampicillin resistance in E. coli, or levan saccharase for mycobacteria, this latter marker being a negative selection marker. 4. Preferred Vectors. BACTERIAL VECTORS As a representative but non-limiting example, useful expression vectors for bacterial use can comprise a selectable marker and a bacterial origin of replication derived from commercially available plasmids comprising genetic elements of pBR322 (ATCC 37017). Such commercial vectors include, for example, pKK223-3 (Pharmacia, Uppsala, Sweden), and GEM1 (Promega Biotec, Madison, WI, USA). Large numbers of other suitable vectors are known to those of skill in the art, and commercially available, such as the following bacterial vectors: pQE70, pQE60, pQE-9 (Qiagen), pbs, pDIO, phagescript, psiX174, pbluescript SK, pbsks, pNH8A, pNH16A, pNH18A, pNH46A (Stratagene); ptrc99a, pKK223-3, pKK233-3, pDR540, pRIT5 (Pharmacia); pWLNEO, pSV2CAT, pOG44, pXTl, pSG (Stratagene); pSVK3, pBPV, pMSG, pSVL (Pharmacia); pQE-30 (QIAexpress). BACTERIOPHAGE VECTORS 5 The PI bacteriophage vector may contain large inserts ranging from about 80 to about 100 kb. The construction of PI bacteriophage vectors such as pi 58 or pl58/neo8 are notably described by Sternberg (1992, 1994). Recombinant PI clones comprising PG-3 nucleotide sequences may be designed for inserting large polynucleotides of more than 40 kb (Linton et al. , 10 1993). To generate PI DNA for transgenic experiments, a preferred protocol is the protocol described by McCormick et α/.(1994). Briefly, E. coli (preferably strain NS3529) harboring the PI plasmid are grown overnight in a suitable broth medium containing 25 μg/ml of kanamycin. The PI DNA is prepared from the E. coli by alkaline lysis using the Qiagen Plasmid Maxi kit (Qiagen, Chatsworth, CA, USA), according to the manufacturer's instructions. The PI DNA is purified from 15 the bacterial lysate on two Qiagen-tip 500 columns, using the washing and elution buffers contained in the kit. A phenol/chloroform extraction is then performed before precipitating the DNA with 70% ethanol. After solubilizing the DNA in TE (10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.4, 1 mM EDTA), the concentration of the DNA is assessed by spectrophotometry. When the goal is to express a PI clone comprising PG-3 nucleotide sequences in a 20 transgenic animal, typically in transgenic mice, it is desirable to remove vector sequences from the PI DNA fragment, for example by cleaving the PI DNA at rare-cutting sites within the PI polylinker (Sfil, Notl or Sail). The PI insert is then purified from vector sequences on a pulsed- field agarose gel, using methods similar using methods similar to those originally reported for the isolation of DNA from YACs (Schedl et al, 1993a; Peterson et al, 1993). At this stage, the 25 resulting purified insert DNA can be concentrated, if necessary, on a Millipore Ulfrafree-MC Filter Unit (Millipore, Bedford, MA, USA - 30,000 molecular weight limit) and then dialyzed against microinjection buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.4; 250 μM EDTA) containing 100 mM NaCl, 30 μM spermine, 70 μM spermidine on a microdyalisis membrane (type VS, 0.025 μM from Millipore). The intactness of the purified PI DNA insert is assessed by electrophoresis on 1% agarose (Sea 30 Kem GTG; FMC Bio-products) pulse-field gel and staining with ethidium bromide. BACULOVIRUS VECTORS A suitable vector for the expression of the PG-3 polypeptide of SEQ ID No 3 or fragments or variants thereof is a baculovirus vector that can be propagated in insect cells and in insect cell lines. A specific suitable host vector system is the pVL1392/1393 baculovirus transfer vector 35 (Pharmingen) that is used to transfect the SF9 cell line (ATCC N°CRL 1711) which is derived from Spodoptera frugiper da. Other suitable vectors for the expression of the PG-3 polypeptide of SEQ ID No 3 or fragments or variants thereof in a baculovirus expression system include those described by Chai et α/.(1993), Vlasak et α/.(1983) and Lenhard et α/.(1996). VIRAL VECTORS 5 In one specific embodiment, the vector is derived from an adenovirus. Preferred adenovirus vectors according to the invention are those described by Feldman and Steg (1996) or Ohno et α/.(1994). Another preferred recombinant adenovirus according to this specific embodiment ofthe present invention is the human adenovirus type 2 or 5 (Ad 2 or Ad 5) or an adenovirus of animal origin ( French patent application N° FR-93.05954). 10 Refrovirus vectors and adeno-associated virus vectors are generally understood to be the recombinant gene delivery systems of choice for the transfer of exogenous polynucleotides in vivo , particularly to mammals, including humans. These vectors provide efficient delivery of genes into cells, and the transferred nucleic acids are stably integrated into the chromosomal DNA of the host. Particularly preferred refroviruses for the preparation or construction of refroviral in vitro or 15 in vitro gene delivery vehicles of the present invention include refroviruses selected from the group consisting of Mink-Cell Focus Inducing Virus, Murine Sarcoma Virus, Reticuloendotheliosis virus and Rous Sarcoma virus. Particularly preferred Murine Leukemia Viruses include the 4070A and the 1504A viruses, Abelson (ATCC No VR-999), Friend (ATCC No VR-245), Gross (ATCC No VR-590), Rauscher (ATCC No VR-998) and Moloney Murine Leukemia Virus (ATCC No VR- 20 190; PCT Application No WO 94/24298). Particularly preferred Rous Sarcoma Viruses include Bryan high titer (ATCC Nos VR-334, VR-657, VR-726, VR-659 and VR-728). Other preferred retroviral vectors are those described in Roth et /.(1996), PCT Application No WO 93/25234, PCT Application No WO 94/ 06920, Roux et al, 1989, Julan et al, 1992 and Neda et al, 1991. Yet another viral vector system that is contemplated by the invention consists in the adeno- 25 associated virus (AAV). The adeno-associated virus is a naturally occurring defective virus that requires another virus, such as an adenovirus or a heφes virus, as a helper virus for efficient replication and a productive life cycle (Muzyczka et al, 1992). It is also one of the few viruses that may integrate its DNA into non-dividing cells, and exhibits a high frequency of stable integration (Flotte et al, 1992; Samulski et al, 1989; McLaughlin et al, 1989). One advantageous feature of 30 AAV derives from its reduced efficacy for transducing primary cells relative to fransformed cells. BAC VECTORS The bacterial artificial chromosome (BAC) cloning system (Shizuya et al, 1992) has been developed to stably maintain large fragments of genomic DNA (100-300 kb) in E. coli. A preferred BAC vector consists of pBeloBACl 1 vector that has been described by Kim et α/.(1996). 35 BAC libraries are prepared with this vector using size-selected genomic DNA that has been partially digested using enzymes that permit ligation into either the Bam HI or HindUI sites in the vector. Flanking these cloning sites are T7 and SP6 RNA polymerase transcription initiation sites that can be used to generate end probes by either RNA transcription or PCR methods. After the construction of a BAC library in E. coli, BAC DNA is purified from the host cell as a supercoiled circle. Converting these circular molecules into a linear form precedes both size determination and introduction of the BACs into recipient cells. The cloning site is flanked by two Not I sites, permitting cloned segments to be excised from the vector by Not I digestion. Alternatively, the DNA insert contained in the pBeloBACl 1 vector may be linearized by treatment ofthe BAC vector with the commercially available enzyme lambda terminase that leads to the cleavage at the unique cosN site, but this cleavage method results in a full length BAC clone containing both the insert DNA and the BAC sequences. 5. Delivery Of The Recombinant Vectors In order to effect expression ofthe polynucleotides and polynucleotide constructs ofthe invention, these constructs must be delivered into a cell. This delivery may be accomplished in vitro, as in laboratory procedures for transforming cell lines, or in vivo or ex vivo, as in the treatment of certain diseases states. One mechanism is viral infection where the expression construct is encapsulated in an infectious viral particle. Several non- viral methods for the transfer of polynucleotides into cultured mammalian cells are also contemplated by the present invention, and include, without being limited to, calcium phosphate precipitation (Graham et al, 1973; Chen et al, 1987;), DEAE-dexfran (Gopal, 1985), elecfroporation (Tur-Kaspa et al, 1986; Potter et al, 1984), direct microinjection (Harland et al, 1985), DNA-loaded liposomes (Nicolau et al, 1982; Fraley et al, 1979), and receptor-mediated transfection (Wu and Wu, 1987; 1988). Some of these techniques may be successfully adapted for in vivo or ex vivo use. Once the expression polynucleotide has been delivered into the cell, it may be stably integrated into the genome ofthe recipient cell. This integration may be in the cognate location and orientation via homologous recombination (gene replacement) or it may be integrated in a random, non specific location (gene augmentation). In yet further embodiments, the nucleic acid may be stably maintained in the cell as a separate, episomal segment of DNA. Such nucleic acid segments or "episomes" encode sequences sufficient to permit maintenance and replication independent of or in synchronization with the host cell cycle. One specific embodiment for a method for delivering a protein or peptide to the interior of a cell of a vertebrate in vivo comprises the step of introducing a preparation comprising a physiologically acceptable carrier and a naked polynucleotide operatively coding for the polypeptide of interest into the interstitial space of a tissue comprising the cell, whereby the naked polynucleotide is taken up into the interior ofthe cell and has a physiological effect. This is particularly applicable for transfer in vitro but it may be applied to in vivo as well. Compositions for use in vitro and in vivo comprising a "naked" polynucleotide are described in PCT application N° WO 90/11092 (Vical Inc.), and also in PCT application No. WO 95/1 1307 (Institut Pasteur, INSERM, Universite d'Ottawa), as well as in the articles of Tacson et α/.(1996) and of Huygen et α/.(1996). In still another embodiment of the invention, the transfer of a naked polynucleotide ofthe invention, including a polynucleotide construct ofthe invention, into cells may be proceeded with a particle bombardment (biolistic), said particles being DNA-coated microprojectiles accelerated to a high velocity allowing them to pierce cell membranes and enter cells without killing them, such as described by Klein et α/.(1987). In a further embodiment, the polynucleotide of the invention may be entrapped in a liposome (Ghosh and Bacchawat, 1991; Wong et al, 1980; Nicolau et al, 1987) In a specific embodiment, the invention provides a composition for the in vivo production ofthe PG-3 protein or polypeptide described herein. It comprises a naked polynucleotide operatively coding for this polypeptide, in solution in a physiologically acceptable carrier, and suitable for introduction into a tissue to cause cells ofthe tissue to express the said protein or polypeptide. The amount of vector to be injected to the desired host organism varies according to the site of injection. As an indicative dose, it will be injected between 0,1 and 100 μg ofthe vector in an animal body, preferably a mammal body, for example a mouse body. In another embodiment ofthe vector according to the invention, it may be introduced in vitro in a host cell, preferably in a host cell previously harvested from the animal to be treated and more preferably a somatic cell such as a muscle cell. In a subsequent step, the cell that has been transformed with the vector coding for the desired PG-3 polypeptide or the desired fragment thereof is reintroduced into the animal body in order to deliver the recombinant protein within the body either locally or systemically. CELL HOSTS Another object of the invention consists of a host cell that has been transformed or transfected with one ofthe polynucleotides described herein, and in particular a polynucleotide either comprising a PG-3 regulatory polynucleotide or the coding sequence for the PG-3 polypeptide in a polynucleotide selected from the group consisting of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2 or a fragment or a variant thereof. Also included are host cells that are fransformed (prokaryotic cells) or that are transfected (eukaryotic cells) with a recombinant vector such as one of those described above. More particularly, the cell hosts of the present invention can comprise any ofthe polynucleotides described in the "Genomic Sequences Of The PG3 Gene" section, the "PG-3 cDNA Sequences" section, the "Coding Regions" section, the "Polynucleotide constructs" section, and the "Oligonucleotide Probes And Primers" section. A further recombinant cell host according to the invention comprises a polynucleotide containing a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof. An additional recombinant cell host according to the invention comprises any of the vectors described herein, more particularly any ofthe vectors described in the " Recombinant Vectors" section. Preferred host cells used as recipients for the expression vectors ofthe invention are the following: a) Prokaryotic host cells: Escherichia coli strains (I.E.OW5-0. strain), Bacillus subtilis, Salmonella typhimurium, and strains from species like Pseudomonas, Streptomyces and Staphylococcus. b) Eukaryotic host cells: HeLa cells (ATCC N°CCL2; N°CCL2.1; N°CCL2.2), Cv 1 cells (ATCC N°CCL70), COS cells (ATCC N°CRL1650; N°CRL1651 ), Sf-9 cells (ATCC N°CRL171 1), C127 cells (ATCC N° CRL- 1804), 3T3 (ATCC N° CRL-6361), CHO (ATCC N° CCL-61), human kidney 293. (ATCC N° 45504; N° CRL-1573) and BHK (ECACC N° 84100501 ; N° 841 11301). c) Other mammalian host cells. The PG-3 gene expression in mammalian, and typically human, cells may be rendered defective, or alternatively expression may be provided by the insertion of a PG-3 genomic or cDNA sequence with the replacement ofthe PG-3 gene counteφart in the genome of an animal cell by a PG-3 polynucleotide according to the invention. These genetic alterations may be generated by homologous recombination events using specific DNA constructs that have been previously described. One kind of cell hosts that may be used are mammalian zygotes, such as murine zygotes. For example, murine zygotes may undergo microinjection with a purified DNA molecule of interest, for example a purified DNA molecule that has previously been adjusted to a concentration range from 1 ng/ml -for BAC inserts- 3 ng/μl -for PI bacteriophage inserts- in 10 M Tris-HCl, pH 7.4, 250 μM EDTA containing 100 mM NaCl, 30 μM spermine, and70 μM spermidine. When the DNA to be microinjected has a large size, polyamines and high salt concentrations can be used in order to avoid mechanical breakage of this DNA, as described by Schedl et al (1993b). Anyone ofthe polynucleotides ofthe invention, including the DNA constructs described herein, may be introduced in an embryonic stem (ES) cell line, preferably a mouse ES cell line. ES cell lines are derived from pluripotent, uncommitted cells of the inner cell mass of pre-implantation blastocysts. Preferred ES cell lines are the following: ES-E14TG2a (ATCC n° CRL-1821 ), ES-D3 (ATCC n° CRL1934 and n° CRL-11632), YSOOl (ATCC n° CRL-1 1776), 36.5 (ATCC n° CRL- 11116). To maintain ES cells in an uncommitted state, they are cultured in the presence of growth inhibited feeder cells which provide the appropriate signals to preserve this embryonic phenotype and serve as a matrix for ES cell adherence. Preferred feeder cells consist of primary embryonic fibroblasts that are established from tissue of day 13- day 14 embryos of virtually any mouse strain, that are maintained in culture, such as described by Abbondanzo et at " . (1993) and are inhibited in growth by irradiation, such as described by Robertson (1987), or by the presence of an inhibitory concentration of LIF, such as described by Pease and Williams (1990). The constructs in the host cells can be used in a conventional manner to produce the gene product encoded by the recombinant sequence. Following transformation of a suitable host and growth ofthe host to an appropriate cell density, the selected promoter is induced by appropriate means, such as temperature shift or chemical induction, and cells are cultivated for an additional period. Cells are typically harvested by centrifugation, disrupted by physical or chemical means, and the resulting crude extract retained for further purification. Microbial cells employed in the expression of proteins can be disrupted by any convenient method, including freeze-thaw cycling, sonication, mechanical disruption, or use of cell lysing agents. Such methods are well known by the skill artisan. TRANSGENIC ANIMALS The terms "transgenic animals" or "host animals" are used herein designate animals that have their genome genetically and artificially manipulated so as to include one of the nucleic acids according to the invention. Preferred animals are non-human mammals and include those belonging to a genus selected from Mus (e.g. mice), Rattus (e.g. rats) and Oryctogalus (e.g. rabbits) which have their genome artificially and genetically altered by the insertion of a nucleic acid according to the invention. In one embodiment, the invention encompasses non-human host mammals and animals comprising a recombinant vector of the invention or a PG-3 gene disrupted by homologous recombination with a knock out vector. The transgenic animals ofthe invention all include within a plurality of their cells a cloned recombinant or synthetic DNA sequence, more specifically one of the purified or isolated nucleic acids comprising a PG-3 coding sequence, a PG-3 regulatory polynucleotide, a polynucleotide construct, or a DNA sequence encoding an antisense polynucleotide such as described in the present specification. Generally, a transgenic animal according the present invention comprises any one of the polynucleotides, the recombinant vectors and the cell hosts described in the present invention. More particularly, the transgenic animals ofthe present invention can comprise any of the polynucleotides described in the "Genomic Sequences Of The PG3 Gene" section, the "PG-3 cDNA Sequences" section, the "Coding Regions" section, the "Polynucleotide constructs" section, the "Oligonucleotide Probes And Primers" section, the "Recombinant Vectors" section and the "Cell Hosts" section. A further transgenic animals according to the invention contains in their somatic cells and/or in their germ line cells a polynucleotide comprising a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof. In a first preferred embodiment, these transgenic animals may be good experimental models in order to study the diverse pathologies related to cell differentiation, in particular concerning the transgenic animals within the genome of which has been inserted one or several copies of a polynucleotide encoding a native PG-3 protein, or alternatively a mutant PG-3 protein. In a second preferred embodiment, these transgenic animals may express a desired polypeptide of interest under the control ofthe regulatory polynucleotides ofthe PG-3 gene, leading to good yields in the synthesis of this protein of interest, and eventually a tissue specific expression of this protein of interest. The design ofthe transgenic animals ofthe invention may be made according to the conventional techniques well known from the one skilled in the art. For more details regarding the production of transgenic animals, and specifically transgenic mice, it may be referred to US Patents Nos 4,873,191, issued Oct. 10, 1989; 5,464,764 issued Nov 7, 1995; and 5,789,215, issued Aug 4, 1998; these documents disclosing methods producing transgenic mice. Transgenic animals ofthe present invention are produced by the application of procedures which result in an animal with a genome that has incoφorated exogenous genetic material. The procedure involves obtaining the genetic material, or a portion thereof, which encodes either a PG-3 coding sequence, a PG-3 regulatory polynucleotide or a DNA sequence encoding a PG-3 antisense polynucleotide such as described in the present specification. A recombinant polynucleotide of the invention is inserted into an embryonic or ES stem cell line. The insertion is preferably made using electroporation, such as described by Thomas et α/.(1987). The cells subjected to electroporation are screened (e.g. by selection via selectable markers, by PCR or by Southern blot analysis) to find positive cells which have integrated the exogenous recombinant polynucleotide into their genome, preferably via an homologous recombination event. An illustrative positive-negative selection procedure that may be used according to the invention is described by Mansour et α/.(1988). Then, the positive cells are isolated, cloned and injected into 3.5 days old blastocysts from mice, such as described by Bradley (1987). The blastocysts are then inserted into a female host animal and allowed to grow to term. Alternatively, the positive ES cells are brought into contact with embryos at the 2.5 days old 8-16 cell stage (morulae) such as described by Wood et α/.(1993) or by Nagy et α/.(1993), the ES cells being internalized to colonize extensively the blastocyst including the cells which will give rise to the germ line. The offspring ofthe female host are tested to determine which animals are transgenic e.g. include the inserted exogenous DNA sequence and which are wild-type. Thus, the present invention also concerns a transgenic animal containing a nucleic acid, a recombinant expression vector or a recombinant host cell according to the invention. Recombinant Cell Lines Derived From The Transgenic Animals Of The Invention. A further object ofthe invention consists of recombinant host cells obtained from a transgenic animal described herein. In one embodiment the invention encompasses cells derived from non-human host mammals and animals comprising a recombinant vector of the invention or a PG-3 gene disrupted by homologous recombination with a knock out vector. Recombinant cell lines may be established in vitro from cells obtained from any tissue of a transgenic animal according to the invention, for example by transfection of primary cell cultures with vectors expressing one-genes such as SV40 large T antigen, as described by Chou (1989) and Shay et al( 1991). METHODS FOR SCREENING SUBSTANCES INTERACTING WITH A PG-3 POLYPEPTIDE For the puφose ofthe present invention, a ligand means a molecule, such as a protein, a peptide, an antibody or any synthetic chemical compound capable of binding to the PG-3 protein or one of its fragments or variants or to modulate the expression ofthe polynucleotide coding for PG-3 or a fragment or variant thereof. These molecules may be used in therapeutic compositions, preferably therapeutic compositions acting against cancer. In the ligand screening method according to the present invention, a biological sample or a defined molecule to be tested as a putative ligand ofthe PG-3 protein is brought into contact with the corresponding purified PG-3 protein, for example the corresponding purified recombinant PG-3 protein produced by a recombinant cell host as described hereinbefore, in order to form a complex between this protein and the putative ligand molecule to be tested. As an illustrative example, to study the interaction of the PG-3 protein, or a fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3, with drugs or small molecules, such as molecules generated through combinatorial chemistry approaches, the microdialysis coupled to HPLC method described by Wang et al. (1997) or the affinity capillary electrophoresis method described by Bush et al. (1997). In further methods, peptides, drugs, fatty acids, lipoproteins, or small molecules which interact with the PG-3 protein, or a fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3 may be identified using assays such as the following. The molecule to be tested for binding is labeled with a detectable label, such as a fluorescent , radioactive, or enzymatic tag and placed in contact with immobilized PG-3 protein, or a fragment thereof under conditions which permit specific binding to occur. After removal of non-specifically bound molecules, bound molecules are detected using appropriate means. Another object ofthe present invention consists of methods and kits for the screening of candidate substances that interact with PG-3 polypeptide. The present invention pertains to methods for screening substances of interest that interact with a PG-3 protein or one fragment or variant thereof. By their capacity to bind covalently or non- covalently to a PG-3 protein or to a fragment or variant thereof, these substances or molecules may be advantageously used both in vitro and in vivo. In vitro, said interacting molecules may be used as detection means in order to identify the presence of a PG-3 protein in a sample, preferably a biological sample. A method for the screening of a candidate substance comprises the following steps : a) providing a polypeptide consisting of a PG-3 protein or a fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3; b) obtaining a candidate substance; c) bringing into contact said polypeptide with said candidate substance; d) detecting the complexes formed between said polypeptide and said candidate substance. The invention further concerns a kit for the screening of a candidate substance interacting with the PG-3 polypeptide, wherein said kit comprises: a) a PG-3 protein having an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting ofthe amino acid sequences of SEQ ID No 3 or a peptide fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3; b) optionally means useful to detect the complex formed between the PG-3 protein or a peptide fragment or a variant thereof and the candidate substance. In a preferred embodiment of the kit described above, the detection means consist in monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies directed against the PG-3 protein or a peptide fragment or a variant thereof. Various candidate substances or molecules can be assayed for interaction with a PG-3 polypeptide. These substances or molecules include, without being limited to, natural or synthetic organic compounds or molecules of biological origin such as polypeptides. When the candidate substance or molecule consists of a polypeptide, this polypeptide may be the resulting expression product of a phage clone belonging to a phage-based random peptide library, or alternatively the polypeptide may be the resulting expression product of a cDNA library cloned in a vector suitable for performing a two-hybrid screening assay. The invention also pertains to kits useful for performing the hereinbefore described screening method. Preferably, such kits comprise a PG-3 polypeptide or a fragment or a variant thereof, and optionally means useful to detect the complex formed between the PG-3 polypeptide or its fragment or variant and the candidate substance. In a preferred embodiment the detection means consist in monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies directed against the corresponding PG-3 polypeptide or a fragment or a variant thereof. A. Candidate ligands obtained from random peptide libraries In a particular embodiment ofthe screening method, the putative ligand is the expression product of a DNA insert contained in a phage vector (Parmley and Smith, 1988). Specifically, random peptide phages libraries are used. The random DNA inserts encode for peptides of 8 to 20 amino acids in length (Oldenburg K.R. et al, 1992; Valadon P., et al, 1996; Lucas A.H., 1994; Westerink M.A.J., 1995; Felici F. et al, 1991). According to this particular embodiment, the recombinant phages expressing a protein that binds to the immobilized PG-3 protein is retained and the complex formed between the PG-3 protein and the recombinant phage may be subsequently immunoprecipitated by a polyclonal or a monoclonal antibody directed against the PG-3 protein. Once the ligand library in recombinant phages has been constructed, the phage population is brought into contact with the immobilized PG-3 protein. Then the preparation of complexes is washed in order to remove the non-specifically bound recombinant phages. The phages that bind specifically to the PG-3 protein are then eluted by a buffer (acid pH) or immunoprecipitated by the monoclonal antibody produced by the hybridoma anti-PG-3, and this phage population is subsequently amplified by an over-infection of bacteria (for example E. coli). The selection step may be repeated several times, preferably 2-4 times, in order to select the more specific recombinant phage clones. The last step consists in characterizing the peptide produced by the selected recombinant phage clones either by expression in infected bacteria and isolation, expressing the phage insert in another host-vector system, or sequencing the insert contained in the selected recombinant phages. B. Candidate ligands obtained by competition experiments. Alternatively, peptides, drugs or small molecules which bind to the PG-3 protein, or a fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3, may be identified in competition experiments. In such assays, the PG-3 protein, or a fragment thereof, is immobilized to a surface, such as a plastic plate. Increasing amounts ofthe peptides, drugs or small molecules are placed in contact with the immobilized PG-3 protein, or a fragment thereof, in the presence of a detectable labeled known PG-3 protein ligand. For example, the PG-3 ligand may be detectably labeled with a fluorescent, radioactive, or enzymatic tag. The ability ofthe test molecule to bind the PG-3 protein, or a fragment thereof, is determined by measuring the amount of detectably labeled known ligand bound in the presence ofthe test molecule. A decrease in the amount of known ligand bound to the PG-3 protein, or a fragment thereof, when the test molecule is present indicated that the test molecule is able to bind to the PG-3 protein, or a fragment thereof. C. Candidate ligands obtained by affinity chromatography. Proteins or other molecules interacting with the PG-3 protein, or a fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3, can also be found using affinity columns which contain the PG-3 protein, or a fragment thereof. The PG-3 protein, or a fragment thereof, may be attached to the column using conventional techniques including chemical coupling to a suitable column matrix such as agarose, Affi Gel® , or other matrices familiar to those of skill in art. In some embodiments of this method, the affinity column contains chimeric proteins in which the PG-3 protein, or a fragment thereof, is fused to glutathion S transferase (GST). A mixture of cellular proteins or pool of expressed proteins as described above is applied to the affinity column. Proteins or other molecules interacting with the PG-3 protein, or a fragment thereof, attached to the column can then be isolated and analyzed on 2-D electrophoresis gel as described in Ramunsen et al. (1997). Alternatively, the proteins retained on the affinity column can be purified by electrophoresis based methods and sequenced. The same method can be used to isolate antibodies, to screen phage display products, or to screen phage display human antibodies. D. Candidate ligands obtained by optical biosensor methods Proteins interacting with the PG-3 protein, or a fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3, can also be screened by using an Optical Biosensor as described in Edwards and Leatherbarrow (1997) and also in Szabo et al. (1995). This technique permits the detection of interactions between molecules in real time, without the need of labeled molecules. This technique is based on the surface plasmon resonance (SPR) phenomenon. Briefly, the candidate ligand molecule to be tested is attached to a surface (such as a carboxymethyl dextran matrix). A light beam is directed towards the side of the surface that does not contain the sample to be tested and is reflected by said surface. The SPR phenomenon causes a decrease in the intensity of the reflected light with a specific association of angle and wavelength. The binding of candidate ligand molecules cause a change in the refraction index on the surface, which change is detected as a change in the SPR signal. For screening of candidate ligand molecules or substances that are able to interact with the PG-3 protein, or a fragment thereof, the PG-3 protein, or a fragment thereof, is immobilized onto a surface. This surface consists of one side of a cell through which flows the candidate molecule to be assayed. The binding of the candidate molecule on the PG-3 protein, or a fragment thereof, is detected as a change of the SPR signal. The candidate molecules tested may be proteins, peptides, carbohydrates, lipids, or small molecules generated by combinatorial chemistry. This technique may also be performed by immobilizing eukaryotic or prokaryotic cells or lipid vesicles exhibiting an endogenous or a recombinantly expressed PG-3 protein at their surface. The main advantage ofthe method is that it allows the determination ofthe association rate between the PG-3 protein and molecules interacting with the PG-3 protein. It is thus possible to select specifically ligand molecules interacting with the PG-3 protein, or a fragment thereof, through strong or conversely weak association constants. E. Candidate ligands obtained through a two-hybrid screening assay. The yeast two-hybrid system is designed to study protein-protein interactions in vivo (Fields and Song, 1989), and relies upon the fusion of a bait protein to the DNA binding domain ofthe yeast Gal4 protein. This technique is also described in the US Patent N° US 5,667,973 and the US Patent N° 5,283,173. The general procedure of library screening by the two-hybrid assay may be performed as described by Haφer et al. (1993) or as described by Cho et al. (1998) or also Fromont-Racine et al (1997). The bait protein or polypeptide consists of a PG-3 polypeptide or a fragment comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, more preferably at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3. More precisely, the nucleotide sequence encoding the PG-3 polypeptide or a fragment or variant thereof is fused to a polynucleotide encoding the DNA binding domain ofthe GAL4 protein, the fused nucleotide sequence being inserted in a suitable expression vector, for example pAS2 or pM3. Then, a human cDNA library is constructed in a specially designed vector, such that the human cDNA insert is fused to a nucleotide sequence in the vector that encodes the transcriptional domain of the GAL4 protein. Preferably, the vector used is the pACT vector. The polypeptides encoded by the nucleotide inserts ofthe human cDNA library are termed "pray" polypeptides. A third vector contains a detectable marker gene, such as beta galactosidase gene or CAT gene that is placed under the control of a regulation sequence that is responsive to the binding of a complete Gal4 protein containing both the transcriptional activation domain and the DNA binding domain. For example, the vector pG5EC may be used. Two different yeast strains are also used. As an illustrative but non limiting example the two different yeast strains may be the followings : - Y190, the phenotype of which is (MATa, Leu2-3, 112 ura3-12, trpl-901, his3-D200, ade2- 101, gal4Dgall80D URA3 GAL-LacZ, LYS GAL-HIS3, cyK); - Yl 87, the phenotype of which is (MATa gal4 gal80 his3 trpl-901 ade2-101 ura3-52 leu2-3, -112 URA3 GAL-lacZmef), which is the opposite mating type of Y190. Briefly, 20 μg of pAS2/PG-3 and 20 μg of pACT-cD A library are co-transformed into yeast strain Y190. The transformants are selected for growth on minimal media lacking histidine, leucine and tryptophan, but containing the histidine synthesis inhibitor 3-AT (50 mM). Positive colonies are screened for beta galactosidase by filter lift assay. The double positive colonies (His + , beta-gat) are then grown on plates lacking histidine, leucine, but containing tryptophan and cycloheximide (10 mg/ml) to select for loss of pAS2/PG-3 plasmids bu retention of pACT-cDNA library plasmids. The resulting Y190 strains are mated with Y187 strains expressing PG-3 or non- related confrol proteins; such as cyclophilin B, lamin, or SNF1, as Gal4 fusions as described by Haφer et al. (1993) and by Bram et al. (1993), and screened for beta galactosidase by filter lift assay. Yeast clones that are beta gal- after mating with the control Gal4 fusions are considered false positives. In another embodiment of the two-hybrid method according to the invention, interaction between the PG-3 or a fragment or variant thereof with cellular proteins may be assessed using the Matchmaker Two Hybrid System 2 (Catalog No. Kl 604-1, Clontech). As described in the manual accompanying the Matchmaker Two Hybrid System 2 (Catalog No. K 1604-1, Clontech), nucleic acids encoding the PG-3 protein or a portion thereof, are inserted into an expression vector such that they are in frame with DNA encoding the DNA binding domain ofthe yeast transcriptional activator GAL4. A desired cDNA, preferably human cDNA, is inserted into a second expression vector such that they are in frame with DNA encoding the activation domain of GAL4. The two expression plasmids are transformed into yeast and the yeast are plated on selection medium which selects for expression of selectable markers on each ofthe expression vectors as well as GAL4 dependent expression ofthe HIS3 gene. Transformants capable of growing on medium lacking histidine are screened for GAL4 dependent lacZ expression. Those cells which are positive in both the histidine selection and the lacZ assay contain interaction between PG-3 and the protein or peptide encoded by the initially selected cDNA insert. METHOD FOR SCREENING SUBSTANCES INTERACTING WITH THE REGULATORY SEQUENCES OF THE PG-3 GENE. The present invention also concerns a method for screening substances or molecules that are able to interact with the regulatory sequences ofthe PG-3 gene, such as for example promoter or enhancer sequences. Nucleic acids encoding proteins which are able to interact with the regulatory sequences of the PG-3 gene, more particularly a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the polynucleotides ofthe 5' and 3' regulatory region or a fragment or variant thereof, and preferably a variant comprising one ofthe biallelic markers ofthe invention, may be identified by using a one- hybrid system, such as that described in the booklet enclosed in the Matchmaker One-Hybrid System kit from Clontech (Catalog Ref. n° K 1603-1). Briefly, the target nucleotide sequence is cloned upstream of a selectable reporter sequence and the resulting DNA construct is integrated in the yeast genome (Saccharomyces cerevisiae). The yeast cells containing the reporter sequence in their genome are then fransformed with a library consisting of fusion molecules between cDNAs encoding candidate proteins for binding onto the regulatory sequences ofthe PG-3 gene and sequences encoding the activator domain of a yeast transcription factor such as GALA The recombinant yeast cells are plated in a culture broth for selecting cells expressing the reporter sequence. The recombinant yeast cells thus selected contain a fusion protein that is able to bind onto the target regulatory sequence of the PG-3 gene. Then, the cDNAs encoding the fusion proteins are sequenced and may be cloned into expression or transcription vectors in vitro. The binding of the encoded polypeptides to the target regulatory sequences of the PG-3 gene may be confirmed by techniques familiar to the one skilled in the art, such as gel retardation assays or DNAse protection assays. Gel retardation assays may also be performed independently in order to screen candidate molecules that are able to interact with the regulatory sequences ofthe PG-3 gene, such as described by Fried and Crothers (1981), Garner and Revzin (1981) and Dent and Latchman (1993). These techniques are based on the principle according to which a DNA fragment which is bound to a protein migrates slower than the same unbound DNA fragment. Briefly, the target nucleotide sequence is labeled. Then the labeled target nucleotide sequence is brought into contact with either a total nuclear extract from cells containing transcription factors, or with different candidate molecules to be tested. The interaction between the target regulatory sequence of the PG-3 gene and the candidate molecule or the transcription factor is detected after gel or capillary electrophoresis through a retardation in the migration. METHOD FOR SCREENING LIGANDS THAT MODULATE THE EXPRESSION OF THE PG-3 GENE. Another subject of the present invention is a method for screening molecules that modulate the expression of the PG-3 protein. Such a screening method comprises the steps of: a) cultivating a prokaryotic or an eukaryotic cell that has been transfected with a nucleotide sequence encoding the PG-3 protein or a variant or a fragment thereof, placed under the control of its own promoter; b) bringing into contact the cultivated cell with a molecule to be tested; c) quantifying the expression ofthe PG-3 protein or a variant or a fragment thereof. In an embodiment, the nucleotide sequence encoding the PG-3 protein or a variant or a fragment thereof comprises an allele of at least one ofthe biallelic markers Al to A80, and the complements thereof. Using DNA recombination techniques well known by the one skill in the art, the PG-3 protein encoding DNA sequence is inserted into an expression vector, downstream from its promoter sequence. As an illustrative example, the promoter sequence of the PG-3 gene is contained in the nucleic acid ofthe 5' regulatory region. The quantification ofthe expression ofthe PG-3 protein may be realized either at the mRNA level or at the protein level. In the latter case, polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies may be used to quantify the amounts of the PG-3 protein that have been produced, for example in an ELISA or a RIA assay. In a preferred embodiment, the quantification ofthe PG-3 mRNA is realized by a quantitative PCR amplification ofthe cDNA obtained by a reverse transcription of the total mRNA of the cultivated PG-3 -transfected host cell, using a pair of primers specific for PG-3. The present invention also concerns a method for screening substances or molecules that are able to increase, or in contrast to decrease, the level of expression of the PG-3 gene. Such a method may allow the one skilled in the art to select substances exerting a regulating effect on the expression level of the PG-3 gene and which may be useful as active ingredients included in pharmaceutical compositions for treating patients suffering from cancer. Thus, another aspect ofthe present invention is a method for screening a candidate substance or molecule for the ability to modulate the expression ofthe PG-3 gene, comprising the following steps: a) providing a recombinant cell host containing a nucleic acid, wherein said nucleic acid comprises a nucleotide sequence ofthe 5' regulatory region or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof located upstream of a polynucleotide encoding a detectable protein; b) obtaining a candidate substance; and c) determining the ability of the candidate substance to modulate the expression levels of the polynucleotide encoding the detectable protein. In a further embodiment, the nucleic acid comprising the nucleotide sequence ofthe 5' regulatory region or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof also includes a 5'UTR region ofthe PG-3 cDNA of SEQ ID No 2, or one of its biologically active fragments or variants thereof. Among the preferred polynucleotides encoding a detectable protein, there may be cited polynucleotides encoding beta galactosidase, green fluorescent protein (GFP) and chloramphenicol acetyl transferase (CAT). The invention also pertains to kits useful for performing the herein described screening method. Preferably, such kits comprise a recombinant vector that allows the expression of a nucleotide sequence of the 5' regulatory region or a biologically active fragment or variant thereof located upstream and operably linked to a polynucleotide encoding a detectable protein or the PG-3 protein or a fragment or a variant thereof. In another embodiment of a method for the screening of a candidate substance or molecule for the ability to modulate the expression of the PG-3 gene, the method comprises the following steps: a) providing a recombinant host cell containing a nucleic acid, wherein said nucleic acid comprises a 5'UTR sequence ofthe PG-3 cDNA of SEQ ID No 2, or one of its biologically active fragments or variants, the 5'UTR sequence or its biologically active fragment or variant being operably linked to a polynucleotide encoding a detectable protein; b) obtaining a candidate substance; and c) determining the ability of the candidate substance to modulate the expression levels of the polynucleotide encoding the detectable protein. In a specific embodiment of the above screening method, the nucleic acid that comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of the 5'UTR sequence of the PG-3 cDNA of SEQ ID No 2 or one of its biologically active fragments or variants, includes a promoter sequence which is endogenous with respect to the PG-3 5TJTR sequence. In another specific embodiment ofthe above screening method, the nucleic acid that comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting ofthe 5'UTR sequence of the PG-3 cDNA of SEQ ID No 2 or one of its biologically active fragments or variants, includes a promoter sequence which is exogenous with respect to the PG-3 5TJTR sequence defined therein. In a further preferred embodiment, the nucleic acid comprising the 5'-UTR sequence of the PG-3 cDNA or SEQ ID No 2 or the biologically active fragments thereof includes a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A80 or the complements thereof. The invention further encompasses a kit for the screening of a candidate substance for the ability to modulate the expression of the PG-3 gene, wherein said kit comprises a recombinant vector that comprises a nucleic acid including a 5'UTR sequence of the PG-3 cDNA of SEQ ID No 2, or one of their biologically active fragments or variants, the 5'UTR sequence or its biologically active fragment or variant being operably linked to a polynucleotide encoding a detectable protein. For the design of suitable recombinant vectors useful for performing the screening methods described above, the section ofthe present specification wherein the preferred recombinant vectors of the invention are detailed is pertinent. Expression levels and patterns of PG-3 may be analyzed by solution hybridization with long probes as described in International Patent Application No. WO 97/05277. Briefly, the PG-3 cDNA or the PG-3 genomic DNA described above, or fragments thereof, is inserted at a cloning site immediately downsfream of a bacteriophage (T3, T7 or SP6) RNA polymerase promoter to produce antisense RNA. Preferably, the PG-3 insert comprises at least 100 or more consecutive nucleotides of the genomic DNA sequence or the cDNA sequences. The plasmid is linearized and transcribed in the presence of ribonucleotides comprising modified ribonucleotides (i.e. biotin-UTP and DIG- UTP). An excess of this doubly labeled RNA is hybridized in solution with mRNA isolated from cells or tissues of interest. The hybridization is performed under standard stringent conditions (40- 50°C for 16 hours in an 80%) formamide, 0. 4 M NaCl buffer, pH 7-8). The unhybridized probe is removed by digestion with ribonucleases specific for single-stranded RNA (i.e. RNases CL3, TI, Phy M, U2 or A). The presence ofthe biotin-UTP modification enables capture ofthe hybrid on a microtifration plate coated with streptavidin. The presence ofthe DIG modification enables the hybrid to be detected and quantified by ELISA using an anti-DIG antibody coupled to alkaline phosphatase. Quantitative analysis of PG-3 gene expression may also be performed using arrays. As used herein, the term array means a one dimensional, two dimensional, or multidimensional arrangement of a plurality of nucleic acids of sufficient length to permit specific detection of expression of mRNAs capable of hybndiz g thereto. For example, the arrays may contain a plurality of nucleic acids denved from genes whose expression levels are to be assessed. The arrays may include the PG-3 genomic DNA, the PG-3 cDNA sequences or the sequences complementary thereto or fragments thereof, particularly those comprising at least one of the biallelic markers according the present invention, preferably at least one of the biallelic markers Al to A80. Preferably, the fragments are at least 15 nucleotides in length. In other embodiments, the fragments are at least 25 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, the fragments are at least 50 nucleotides in length. More preferably, the fragments are at least 100 nucleotides in length. In another preferred embodiment, the fragments are more than 100 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments the fragments may be more than 500 nucleotides in length. For example, quantitative analysis of PG-3 gene expression may be performed with a complementary DNA microarray as described by Schena et α/.(1995 and 1996). Full length PG-3 cDNAs or fragments thereof are amplified by PCR and arrayed from a 96-well microtiter plate onto silylated microscope slides using high-speed robotics. Printed arrays are incubated in a humid chamber to allow rehydration of the array elements and nnsed, once in 0. 2% SDS for 1 min, twice in water for 1 min and once for 5 min in sodium borohydπde solution. The arrays are submerged in water for 2 min at 95°C, transferred into 0. 2%> SDS for 1 min, rinsed twice with water, air dried and stored in the dark at 25°C. Cell or tissue mRNA is isolated or commercially obtained and probes are prepared by a single round of reverse transcπption. Probes are hybπdized to 1 cm 2 microarrays under a 14 x 14 mm glass coverslip for 6-12 hours at 60°C. Arrays are washed for 5 min at 25°C in low stringency wash buffer (IX SSC/0. 2% SDS), then for 10 mm at room temperature in high stnngency wash buffer (0. IX SSC/0. 2% SDS). Arrays are scanned in 0. IX SSC using a fluorescence laser scanning device fitted with a custom filter set. Accurate differential expression measurements are obtained by taking the average ofthe ratios of two independent hybndizations. Quantitative analysis of PG-3 gene expression may also be performed with full length PG-3 cDNAs or fragments thereof in complementary DNA arrays as descπbed by Pietu et α/.(1996). The full length PG-3 cDNA or fragments thereof is PCR amplified and spotted on membranes. Then, mRNAs originating from various tissues or cells are labeled with radioactive nucleotides. After hybndization and washing m controlled conditions, the hybπdized mRNAs are detected by phospho-imaging or autoradiography. Duplicate expenments are performed and a quantitative analysis of differentially expressed mRNAs is then performed. Alternatively, expression analysis using the PG-3 genomic DNA, the PG-3 cDNA, or fragments thereof can be done through high density nucleotide arrays as descnbed by Lockhart et α/.(1996) and Sosnowski et α/.(1997). Oligonucleotides of 15-50 nucleotides from the sequences of the PG-3 genomic DNA, the PG-3 cDNA sequences particularly those comprising at least one of biallelic markers according the present invention, preferably at least one biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, or the sequences complementary thereto, are synthesized directly on the chip (Lockhart et al, supra) or synthesized and then addressed to the chip (Sosnowski et al, supra). Preferably, the oligonucleotides are about 20 nucleotides in length. PG-3 cDNA probes labeled with an appropriate compound, such as biotin, digoxigenin or fluorescent dye, are synthesized from the appropriate mRNA population and then randomly fragmented to an average size of 50 to 100 nucleotides. The said probes are then hybridized to the chip. After washing as described in Lockhart et al, supra and application of different electric fields (Sosnowski et al, 1997), the dyes or labeling compounds are detected and quantified. Duplicate hybridizations are performed. Comparative analysis ofthe intensity ofthe signal originating from cDNA probes on the same target oligonucleotide in different cDNA samples indicates a differential expression of PG-3 mRNA. METHODS FOR INHIBITING THE EXPRESSION OF A PG-3 GENE Other therapeutic compositions according to the present invention comprise advantageously an oligonucleotide fragment ofthe nucleic sequence of PG-3 as an antisense tool or a triple helix tool that inhibits the expression ofthe corresponding PG-3 gene. A preferred fragment ofthe nucleic sequence of PG-3 comprises an allele of at least one ofthe biallelic markers Al to A80. Antisense Approach Preferred methods using antisense polynucleotide according to the present invention are the procedures described by Sczakiel et α/.(1995). Preferably, the antisense tools are chosen among the polynucleotides (15-200 bp long) that are complementary to the 5'end ofthe PG-3 mRNA. In another embodiment, a combination of different antisense polynucleotides complementary to different parts ofthe desired targeted gene are used. Preferred antisense polynucleotides according to the present invention are complementary to a sequence ofthe mRNAs of PG-3 that contains either the translation initiation codon ATG or a splicing donor or acceptor site. The antisense nucleic acids should have a length and melting temperature sufficient to permit formation of an intracellular duplex having sufficient stability to inhibit the expression ofthe PG-3 mRNA in the duplex. Strategies for designing antisense nucleic acids suitable for use in gene therapy are disclosed in Green et al, (1986) and Izant and Weintraub, (1984). In some strategies, antisense molecules are obtained by reversing the orientation ofthe PG- 3 coding region with respect to a promoter so as to transcribe the opposite strand from that which is normally transcribed in the cell. The antisense molecules may be transcribed using in vitro transcription systems such as those which employ T7 or SP6 polymerase to generate the transcript. Another approach involves transcription of PG-3 antisense nucleic acids in vivo by operably linking DNA containing the antisense sequence to a promoter in a suitable expression vector. Alternatively, suitable antisense strategies are those described by Rossi et al. (1991), in the International Applications Nos. WO 94/23026, WO 95/04141, WO 92/18522 and in the European Patent Application No. EP 0 572 287 A2. An alternative to the antisense technology that is used according to the present invention consists in using πbozymes that will bind to a target sequence via their complementary polynucleotide tail and that will cleave the corresponding RNA by hydrolyzing its target site (namely "hammerhead πbozymes"). Briefly, the simplified cycle of a hammerhead ribozyme consists of (1) sequence specific binding to the target RNA via complementary antisense sequences; (2) site-specific hydrolysis ofthe cleavable motif of the target strand; and (3) release of cleavage products, which gives rise to another catalytic cycle. Indeed, the use of long-chain antisense polynucleotide (at least 30 bases long) or nbozymes with long antisense arms are advantageous. A preferred delivery system for antisense nbozyme is achieved by covalently linking these antisense nbozymes to hpophilic groups or to use liposomes as a convenient vector. Preferred antisense nbozymes according to the present invention are prepared as descπbed by Sczakiel et al (1995). Triple Helix Approach The PG-3 genomic DNA may also be used to inhibit the expression of the PG-3 gene based on intracellular triple helix formation. Tπple helix oligonucleotides are used to inhibit transcnption from a genome They are particularly useful for studying alterations in cell activity when it is associated with a particular gene. Similarly, a portion ofthe PG-3 genomic DNA can be used to study the effect of inhibiting PG-3 transcnption within a cell. Traditionally, homopurine sequences were considered the most useful for tπple helix strategies. However, homopyrimidine sequences can also inhibit gene expression. Such homopyrimidine oligonucleotides bind to the major groove at homopuπne:homopyπmιdιne sequences. Thus, both types of sequences from the PG-3 genomic DNA are contemplated within the scope of this invention. To carry out gene therapy strategies using the tπple helix approach, the sequences ofthe PG-3 genomic DNA are first scanned to identify 10-mer to 20-mer homopyrimidine or homopurine stretches which could be used m tπple-hehx based strategies for inhibiting PG-3 expression. Following identification of candidate homopyπmidine or homopunne stretches, their efficiency in inhibiting PG-3 expression is assessed by introducing varying amounts of oligonucleotides containing the candidate sequences into tissue culture cells which express the PG-3 gene The oligonucleotides can be introduced into the cells using a vanety of methods known to those skilled in the art, including but not limited to calcium phosphate precipitation, DEAE- Dexfran, electroporation, hposome-mediated transfection or native uptake. Treated cells are monitored for altered cell function or reduced PG-3 expression using techniques such as Northern blotting, RNase protection assays, or PCR based strategies to monitor the transcription levels ofthe PG-3 gene in cells which have been treated with the oligonucleotide. The oligonucleotides which are effective in inhibiting gene expression in tissue culture cells 5 may then be introduced in vivo using the techniques descnbed above in the antisense approach at a dosage calculated based on the in vitro results, as described in antisense approach. In some embodiments, the natural (beta) anomers of the oligonucleotide units can be replaced with alpha anomers to render the oligonucleotide more resistant to nucleases. Further, an intercalating agent such as ethidium bromide, or the like, can be attached to the 3' end ofthe alpha 10 oligonucleotide to stabilize the tnple helix. For information on the generation of oligonucleotides suitable for tπple helix formation see Gπffin et al (1989), which is hereby incoφorated by this reference. COMPUTER-RELATED EMBODIMENTS As used herein the term "nucleic acid codes ofthe invention" encompass the nucleotide 15 sequences compnsmg, consisting essentially of, or consisting of any one ofthe following: a) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1 : 1-97921, 98517-103471, 103603-108222, 108390-109221, 109324-114409, 114538-115723, 115957-122102, 122225-126876, 127033- 20 157212, 157808-240825; b) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof; and, c) a nucleotide sequence complementary to any one ofthe preceding nucleotide sequences. The "nucleic acid codes ofthe invention" further encompass nucleotide sequences homologous to: a) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 25 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1 : 1-97921, 98517- 103471, 103603-108222, 108390-109221, 109324-114409, 114538-115723, 115957-122102, 122225-126876, 127033-157212, 157808-240825; b) a contiguous span of at least 12, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 500, or 1000 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the 30 complements thereof; and, c) sequences complementary to all ofthe preceding sequences. Homologous sequences refer to a sequence having at least 99%, 98%, 97%, 96%, 95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, or 75% homology to these contiguous spans. Homology may be determined using any method descnbed herein, including BLAST2N with the default parameters or with any modified parameters. Homologous sequences also may include RNA sequences in which undmes replace the thymmes m the 35 nucleic acid codes ofthe invention. It will be appreciated that the nucleic acid codes ofthe invention can be represented in the traditional single character format (See the inside back cover of Stryer, Lubert. 1995) or in any other format or code which records the identity ofthe nucleotides in a sequence. As used herein the term "polypeptide codes ofthe invention" encompass the polypeptide sequences comprising a contiguous span of at least 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, or 100 amino 5 acids of SEQ ID No 3. It will be appreciated that the polypeptide codes ofthe invention can be represented in the traditional single character format or three letter format (See the inside back cover of Stryer, Lubert.) or in any other format or code which records the identity ofthe polypeptides in a sequence. It will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that the nucleic acid codes of the invention 10 and polypeptide codes ofthe invention can be stored, recorded, and manipulated on any medium which can be read and accessed by a computer. As used herein, the words "recorded" and "stored" refer to a process for storing information on a computer medium. A skilled artisan can readily adopt any ofthe presently known methods for recording information on a computer readable medium to generate manufactures comprising one or more ofthe nucleic acid codes ofthe invention, or one or 15 more ofthe polypeptide codes ofthe invention. Another aspect ofthe present invention is a computer readable medium having recorded thereon at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 nucleic acid codes of the invention. Another aspect ofthe present invention is a computer readable medium having recorded thereon at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 polypeptide codes ofthe invention. Computer readable media include magnetically readable media, optically readable media, 20 electronically readable media and magnetic/optical media. For example, the computer readable media may be a hard disk, a floppy disk, a magnetic tape, CD-ROM, Digital Versatile Disk (DVD), Random Access Memory (RAM), or Read Only Memory (ROM) as well as other types of other media known to those skilled in the art. Embodiments ofthe present invention include systems, particularly computer systems which 25 store and manipulate the sequence information described herein. One example of a computer system 100 is illustrated in block diagram form in Figure 1. As used herein, "a computer system" refers to the hardware components, software components, and data storage components used to analyze the nucleotide sequences ofthe nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the amino acid sequences ofthe polypeptide codes ofthe invention. In one embodiment, the computer system 100 is a Sun Enteφrise 30 1000 server (Sun Microsystems, Palo Alto, CA). The computer system 100 preferably includes a processor for processing, accessing and manipulating the sequence data. The processor 105 can be any well-known type of central processing unit, such as the Pentium III from Intel Coφoration, or similar processor from Sun, Motorola, Compaq or International Business Machines. Preferably, the computer system 100 is a general puφose system that comprises the processor 35 105 and one or more internal data storage components 110 for storing data, and one or more data retrieving devices for retrieving the data stored on the data storage components. A skilled artisan can readily appreciate that any one ofthe currently available computer systems are suitable. In one particular embodiment, the computer system 100 includes a processor 105 connected to a bus which is connected to a main memory 115 (preferably implemented as RAM) and one or more internal data storage devices 110, such as a hard drive and/or other computer readable media having data recorded thereon. In some embodiments, the computer system 100 further includes one or more data retrieving device 118 for reading the data stored on the internal data storage devices 110. The data retrieving device 118 may represent, for example, a floppy disk drive, a compact disk drive, a magnetic tape drive, etc. In some embodiments, the internal data storage device 110 is a removable computer readable medium such as a floppy disk, a compact disk, a magnetic tape, etc. containing control logic and/or data recorded thereon. The computer system 100 may advantageously include or be programmed by appropriate software for reading the control logic and/or the data from the data storage component once inserted in the data retrieving device. The computer system 100 includes a display 120 which is used to display output to a computer user. It should also be noted that the computer system 100 can be linked to other computer systems 125a-c in a network or wide area network to provide centralized access to the computer system 100. Software for accessing and processing the nucleotide sequences ofthe nucleic acid codes of the invention or the amino acid sequences ofthe polypeptide codes ofthe invention (such as search tools, compare tools, and modeling tools etc.) may reside in main memory 115 during execution. In some embodiments, the computer system 100 may further comprise a sequence comparer for comparing the above-described nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the polypeptide codes ofthe invention stored on a computer readable medium to reference nucleotide or polypeptide sequences stored on a computer readable medium. A "sequence comparer" refers to one or more programs which are implemented on the computer system 100 to compare a nucleotide or polypeptide sequence with other nucleotide or polypeptide sequences and/or compounds including but not limited to peptides, peptidomimetics, and chemicals stored within the data storage means. For example, the sequence comparer may compare the nucleotide sequences of nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the amino acid sequences ofthe polypeptide codes ofthe invention stored on a computer readable medium to reference sequences stored on a computer readable medium to identify homologies, motifs implicated in biological function, or structural motifs. The various sequence comparer programs identified elsewhere in this patent specification are particularly contemplated for use in this aspect ofthe invention. Figure 2 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of a process 200 for comparing a new nucleotide or protein sequence with a database of sequences in order to determine the homology levels between the new sequence and the sequences in the database. The database of sequences can be a private database stored within the computer system 100, or a public database such as GENBANK, PIR OR SWISSPROT that is available through the Internet. The process 200 begins at a start state 201 and then moves to a state 202 wherein the new sequence to be compared is stored to a memory in a computer system 100. As discussed above, the memory could be any type of memory, including RAM or an internal storage device. The process 200 then moves to a state 204 wherein a database of sequences is opened for analysis and comparison. The process 200 then moves to a state 206 wherein the first sequence stored in the database is read into a memory on the computer. A comparison is then performed at a state 210 to determine if the first sequence is the same as the second sequence. It is important to note that this step is not limited to performing an exact comparison between the new sequence and the first sequence in the database. Well-known methods are known to those of skill in the art for comparing two nucleotide or protein sequences, even if they are not identical. For example, gaps can be introduced into one sequence in order to raise the homology level between the two tested sequences. The parameters that control whether gaps or other features are introduced into a sequence during comparison are normally entered by the user ofthe computer system. Once a comparison ofthe two sequences has been performed at the state 210, a determination is made at a decision state 210 whether the two sequences are the same. Of course, the term "same" is not limited to sequences that are absolutely identical. Sequences that are within the homology parameters entered by the user will be marked as "same" in the process 200. If a determination is made that the two sequences are the same, the process 200 moves to a state 214 wherein the name ofthe sequence from the database is displayed to the user. This state notifies the user that the sequence with the displayed name fulfills the homology constraints that were entered. Once the name ofthe stored sequence is displayed to the user, the process 200 moves to a decision state 218 wherein a determination is made whether more sequences exist in the database. If no more sequences exist in the database, then the process 200 terminates at an end state 220. However, if more sequences do exist in the database, then the process 200 moves to a state 224 wherein a pointer is moved to the next sequence in the database so that it can be compared to the new sequence. In this manner, the new sequence is aligned and compared with every sequence in the database. It should be noted that if a determination had been made at the decision state 212 that the sequences were not homologous, then the process 200 would move immediately to the decision state 218 in order to determine if any other sequences were available in the database for comparison. Accordingly, one aspect ofthe present invention is a computer system comprising a processor, a data storage device having stored thereon a nucleic acid code ofthe invention or a polypeptide code ofthe invention, a data storage device having retrievably stored thereon reference nucleotide sequences or polypeptide sequences to be compared to the nucleic acid code ofthe invention or polypeptide code ofthe invention and a sequence comparer for conducting the comparison. The sequence comparer may indicate a homology level between the sequences compared or identify structural motifs in the nucleic acid code ofthe invention and polypeptide codes ofthe invention or it may identify structural motifs in sequences which are compared to these nucleic acid codes and polypeptide codes. In some embodiments, the data storage device may have stored thereon the sequences of at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 ofthe nucleic acid codes of the invention or polypeptide codes of the invention. Another aspect ofthe present invention is a method for determining the level of homology between a nucleic acid code ofthe invention and a reference nucleotide sequence, comprising the steps of reading the nucleic acid code and the reference nucleotide sequence through the use of a computer program which determines homology levels and determining homology between the nucleic acid code and the reference nucleotide sequence with the computer program. The computer program may be any of a number of computer programs for determining homology levels, including those specifically enumerated herein, including BLAST2N with the default parameters or with any modified parameters. The method may be implemented using the computer systems described above. The method may also be performed by reading 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 ofthe above described nucleic acid codes ofthe invention through the use of the computer program and determining homology between the nucleic acid codes and reference nucleotide sequences. Figure 3 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of a process 250 in a computer for determining whether two sequences are homologous. The process 250 begins at a start state 252 and then moves to a state 254 wherein a first sequence to be compared is stored to a memory. The second sequence to be compared is then stored to a memory at a state 256. The process 250 then moves to a state 260 wherein the first character in the first sequence is read and then to a state 262 wherein the first character ofthe second sequence is read. It should be understood that if the sequence is a nucleotide sequence, then the character would normally be either A, T, C, G or U. If the sequence is a protein sequence, then it should be in the single letter amino acid code so that the first and sequence sequences can be easily compared. A determination is then made at a decision state 264 whether the two characters are the same. If they are the same, then the process 250 moves to a state 268 wherein the next characters in the first and second sequences are read. A determination is then made whether the next characters are the same. If they are, then the process 250 continues this loop until two characters are not the same. If a determination is made that the next two characters are not the same, the process 250 moves to a decision state 274 to determine whether there are any more characters either sequence to read. If there aren't any more characters to read, then the process 250 moves to a state 276 wherein the level of homology between the first and second sequences is displayed to the user. The level of homology is determined by calculating the proportion of characters between the sequences that were the same out ofthe total number of sequences in the first sequence. Thus, if every character in a first 100 nucleotide sequence aligned with a every character in a second sequence, the homology level would be 100%. Alternatively, the computer program may be a computer program which compares the nucleotide sequences ofthe nucleic acid codes ofthe present invention, to reference nucleotide sequences in order to determine whether the nucleic acid code ofthe invention differs from a reference nucleic acid sequence at one or more positions. Optionally such a program records the length and identity of inserted, deleted or substituted nucleotides with respect to the sequence of either the reference polynucleotide or the nucleic acid code ofthe invention. In one embodiment, the computer program may be a program which determines whether the nucleotide sequences ofthe nucleic acid codes ofthe invention contain one or more single nucleotide polymoφhisms (SNP) with respect to a reference nucleotide sequence. These single nucleotide polymoφhisms may each comprise a single base substitution, insertion, or deletion. Another aspect ofthe present invention is a method for determining the level of homology between a polypeptide code ofthe invention and a reference polypeptide sequence, comprising the steps of reading the polypeptide code ofthe invention and the reference polypeptide sequence through use of a computer program which determines homology levels and determining homology between the polypeptide code and the reference polypeptide sequence using the computer program. Accordingly, another aspect of the present invention is a method for determining whether a nucleic acid code ofthe invention differs at one or more nucleotides from a reference nucleotide sequence comprising the steps of reading the nucleic acid code and the reference nucleotide sequence through use of a computer program which identifies differences between nucleic acid sequences and identifying differences between the nucleic acid code and the reference nucleotide sequence with the computer program. In some embodiments, the computer program is a program which identifies single nucleotide polymoφhisms The method may be implemented by the computer systems described above and the method illustrated in Figure 3. The method may also be performed by reading at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 of the nucleic acid codes ofthe invention and the reference nucleotide sequences through the use ofthe computer program and identifying differences between the nucleic acid codes and the reference nucleotide sequences with the computer program. In other embodiments the computer based system may further comprise an identifier for identifying features within the nucleotide sequences ofthe nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the amino acid sequences ofthe polypeptide codes of the invention. An "identifier" refers to one or more programs which identifies certain features within the above-described nucleotide sequences ofthe nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the amino acid sequences ofthe polypeptide codes of the invention. In one embodiment, the identifier may comprise a program which identifies an open reading frame in the cDNAs codes ofthe invention. Figure 4 is a flow diagram illustrating one embodiment of an identifier process 300 for detecting the presence of a feature in a sequence. The process 300 begins at a start state 302 and then moves to a state 304 wherein a first sequence that is to be checked for features is stored to a memory 115 in the computer system 100. The process 300 then moves to a state 306 wherein a database of sequence features is opened. Such a database would include a list of each feature's attributes along with the name ofthe feature. For example, a feature name could be "Initiation Codon" and the attribute would be "ATG". Another example would be the feature name "TAATAA Box" and the feature attribute would be "TAATAA". An example of such a database is produced by the University of Wisconsin Genetics Computer Group (www.gcg.com). Once the database of features is opened at the state 306, the process 300 moves to a state 308 wherein the first feature is read from the database. A comparison ofthe attribute ofthe first feature with the first sequence is then made at a state 310. A determination is then made at a decision state 316 whether the attribute ofthe feature was found in the first sequence. If the attribute was found, then the process 300 moves to a state 318 wherein the name ofthe found feature is displayed to the user. The process 300 then moves to a decision state 320 wherein a determination is made whether move features exist in the database. If no more features do exist, then the process 300 terminates at an end state 324. However, if more features do exist in the database, then the process 300 reads the next sequence feature at a state 326 and loops back to the state 310 wherein the attribute of the next feature is compared against the first sequence. It should be noted, that if the feature attribute is not found in the first sequence at the decision state 316, the process 300 moves directly to the decision state 320 in order to determine if any more features exist in the database. In another embodiment, the identifier may comprise a molecular modeling program which determines the 3-dimensional structure of the polypeptides codes of the invention. In some embodiments, the molecular modeling program identifies target sequences that are most compatible with profiles representing the structural environments of the residues in known three-dimensional protein structures. (See, e.g., Eisenberg et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,436,850 issued July 25, 1995). In another technique, the known three-dimensional structures of proteins in a given family are superimposed to define the structurally conserved regions in that family. This protein modeling technique also uses the known three-dimensional structure of a homologous protein to approximate the structure ofthe polypeptide codes of the invention. (See e.g., Srinivasan, et al, U.S. Patent No. 5,557,535 issued September 17, 1996). Conventional homology modeling techniques have been used routinely to build models of proteases and antibodies. (Sowdhamini et al, (1997)). Comparative approaches can also be used to develop three-dimensional protein models when the protein of interest has poor sequence identity to template proteins. In some cases, proteins fold into similar three-dimensional structures despite having very weak sequence identities. For example, the three-dimensional structures of a number of helical cytokines fold in similar three-dimensional topology in spite of weak sequence homology. The recent development of threading methods now enables the identification of likely folding patterns in a number of situations where the structural relatedness between target and template(s) is not detectable at the sequence level. Hybrid methods, in which fold recognition is performed using Multiple Sequence Threading (MST), structural equivalencies are deduced from the threading output using a distance geometry program DRAGON to construct a low resolution model, and a full-atom representation is constructed using a molecular modeling package such as QUANTA. According to this 3-step approach, candidate templates are first identified by using the novel fold recognition algorithm MST, which is capable of performing simultaneous threading of multiple aligned sequences onto one or more 3-D structures. In a second step, the structural equivalencies obtained from the MST output are converted into interresidue distance restraints and fed into the distance geometry program DRAGON, together with auxiliary information obtained from secondary structure predictions. The program combines the restraints in an unbiased manner and rapidly generates a large number of low resolution model confirmations. In a third step, these low resolution model confirmations are converted into full-atom models and subjected to energy minimization using the molecular modeling package QUANTA. (See e.g., Aszόdi et al, (1997)). The results ofthe molecular modeling analysis may then be used in rational drug design techniques to identify agents which modulate the activity of the polypeptide codes ofthe invention. Accordingly, another aspect ofthe present invention is a method of identifying a feature within the nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the polypeptide codes ofthe invention comprising reading the nucleic acid code(s) or the polypeptide code(s) through the use of a computer program which identifies features therein and identifying features within the nucleic acid code(s) or polypeptide code(s) with the computer program. In one embodiment, computer program comprises a computer program which identifies open reading frames. In a further embodiment, the computer program identifies structural motifs in a polypeptide sequence. In another embodiment, the computer program comprises a molecular modeling program. The method may be performed by reading a single sequence or at least 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, or 50 of the nucleic acid codes of the invention or the polypeptide codes ofthe invention through the use ofthe computer program and identifying features within the nucleic acid codes or polypeptide codes with the computer program. The nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the polypeptide codes ofthe invention may be stored and manipulated in a variety of data processor programs in a variety of formats. For example, they may be stored as text in a word processing file, such as MicrosoftWORD or WORDPERFECT or as an ASCII file in a variety of database programs familiar to those of skill in the art, such as DB2, SYBASE, or ORACLE. In addition, many computer programs and databases may be used as sequence comparers, identifiers, or sources of reference nucleotide or polypeptide sequences to be compared to the nucleic acid codes of the invention or the polypeptide codes ofthe invention. The following list is intended not to limit the invention but to provide guidance to programs and databases which are useful with the nucleic acid codes ofthe invention or the polypeptide codes ofthe invention. The programs and databases which may be used include, but are not limited to: MacPattem (EMBL), DiscoveryBase (Molecular Applications Group), GeneMine (Molecular Applications Group), Look (Molecular Applications Group), MacLook (Molecular Applications Group), BLAST and BLAST2 (NCBI), BLASTN and BLASTX (Altschul et al, 1990), FASTA (Pearson and Lipman, 1988), FASTDB (Brutlag et al, 1990), Catalyst (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Catalyst/SHAPE (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Cerius 2 .DBAccess (Molecular Simulations Inc.), HypoGen (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Insight II, (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Discover (Molecular Simulations Inc.), CHARMm (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Felix (Molecular Simulations Inc.), DelPhi, (Molecular Simulations Inc.), QuanteMM, (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Homology (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Modeler (Molecular Simulations Inc.), ISIS (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Quanta Protein Design (Molecular Simulations Inc.), WebLab (Molecular Simulations Inc.), WebLab Diversity Explorer (Molecular Simulations Inc.), Gene Explorer (Molecular Simulations Inc.), SeqFold (Molecular Simulations Inc.), the EMBL/Swissprotein database, the MDL Available Chemicals Directory database, the MDL Drug Data Report data base, the Comprehensive Medicinal Chemistry database, Derwents's World Drug Index database, the BioByteMasterFile database, the Genbank database, the Genseqn database and the Genseqp databases. Many other programs and data bases would be apparent to one of skill in the art given the present disclosure. Motifs which may be detected using the above programs include sequences encoding leucine zippers, helix-turn-helix motifs, glycosylation sites, ubiquitination sites, alpha helices, and beta sheets, signal sequences encoding signal peptides which direct the secretion ofthe encoded proteins, sequences implicated in transcription regulation such as homeoboxes, acidic stretches, enzymatic active sites, substrate binding sites, and enzymatic cleavage sites. Throughout this application, various publications, patents and published patent applications are cited. The disclosures of these publications, patents and published patent specification referenced in this application are hereby incoφorated by reference into the present disclosure to more fully describe the sate ofthe art to which this invention pertains. EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 1 IDENTIFICATION OF BIALLELIC MARKERS - DNA EXTRACTION Donors were unrelated and healthy. They presented a sufficient diversity for being representative of a French heterogeneous population. The DNA from 100 individuals was extracted and tested for the detection ofthe biallelic markers. 30 ml of peripheral venous blood were taken from each donor in the presence of EDTA. Cells (pellet) were collected after centrifugation for 10 minutes at 2000 φm. Red cells were lysed by a lysis solution (50 ml final volume: 10 mM Tris pH7.6; 5 mM MgCl 2 ; 10 mM NaCl). The solution was centrifuged (10 minutes, 2000 φm) as many times as necessary to eliminate the residual red cells present in the supernatant, after resuspension ofthe pellet in the lysis solution. The pellet of white cells was lysed overnight at 42°C with 3.7 ml of lysis solution composed of: - 3 ml TE 10-2 (Tris-HCl 10 mM, EDTA 2 mM) / NaCl 0 4 M - 200 μl SDS 10% - 500 μl K-proteinase (2 mg K-proteinase in TE 10-2 / NaCl 0.4 M). For the extraction of proteins, 1 ml saturated NaCl (6M) (1/3.5 v/v) was added. After vigorous agitation, the solution was centrifuged for 20 minutes at 10000 φm. For the precipitation of DNA, 2 to 3 volumes of 100% ethanol were added to the previous supernatant, and the solution was centrifuged for 30 minutes at 2000 φm. The DNA solution was rinsed three times with 70% ethanol to eliminate salts, and centrifuged for 20 minutes at 2000 φm. The pellet was dried at 37°C, and resuspended in 1 ml TE 10-1 or 1 ml water. The DNA concentration was evaluated by measuring the OD at 260 nm (1 unit OD = 50 μg/ml DNA). To determine the presence of proteins in the DNA solution, the OD 260 / OD 280 ratio was determined. Only DNA preparations having a OD 260 / OD 280 ratio between 1.8 and 2 were used in the subsequent examples described below. The pool was constituted by mixing equivalent quantities of DNA from each individual. EXAMPLE 2 IDENTIFICATION OF BIALLELIC MARKERS: AMPLIFICATION OF GENOMIC DNA BY PCR The amplification of specific genomic sequences of the DNA samples of example 1 was carried out on the pool of DNA obtained previously. In addition, 50 individual samples were similarly amplified. PCR assays were performed using the following protocol: Final volume 25 μl DNA 2 ng/μl MgCl 2 2 mM dNTP (each) 200 μM primer (each) 2.9 ng/μl Ampli Taq Gold DNA polymerase 0.05 unit/μl PCR buffer (lOx = 0.1 M TrisHCl pH8.3 0.5M KCl) lx Each pair of first primers was designed using the sequence information ofthe PG-3 gene disclosed herein and the OSP software (Hillier & Green, 1991). This first pair of primers was about 20 nucleotides in length and had the sequences disclosed in Table 1 in the columns labeled PU and RP. Table 1 Preferably, the primers contained a common oligonucleotide tail upstream of the specific bases targeted for amplification which was useful for sequencing. Primers PU contain the following additional PU 5' sequence: TGTAAAACGACGGCCAGT; primers RP contain the following RP 5' sequence: CAGGAAACAGCTATGACC. The primer containing the additional PU 5' sequence is listed in SEQ ID No 4. The primer containing the additional RP 5' sequence is listed in SEQ ID No 5. The synthesis of these primers was performed following the phosphoramidite method, on a GENSET UFPS 24.1 synthesizer. DNA amplification was performed on a Genius II thermocycler. After heating at 95°C for 10 min, 40 cycles were performed. Each cycle comprised: 30 sec at 95°C, 54°C for 1 min, and 30 sec at 72°C. For final elongation, 10 min at 72°C ended the amplification. The quantities of the amplification products obtained were determined on 96-well microtiter plates, using a fluorometer and Picogreen as intercalant agent (Molecular Probes). EXAMPLE 3 IDENTIFICATION OF BIALLELIC MARKERS - SEQUENCING OF AMPLIFIED GENOMIC DNA AND IDENTIFICATION OF POLYMORPHISMS The sequencing of the amplified DNA obtained in example 2 was carried out on ABI 377 sequencers. The sequences ofthe amplification products were determined using automated dideoxy terminator sequencing reactions with a dye terminator cycle sequencing protocol. The products of the sequencing reactions were run on sequencing gels and the sequences were determined using gel image analysis (ABI Prism DNA Sequencing Analysis software (2.1.2 version)). The sequence data were further evaluated to detect the presence of biallelic markers within the amplified fragments. The polymoφhism search was based on the presence of superimposed peaks in the electrophoresis pattern resulting from different bases occurring at the same position as described previously. In the 52 fragments of amplification, 80 biallelic markers were detected. The localization of these biallelic markers are as shown in Table 2. Table 2 BM refers to "biallelic marker". All l and all2 refer respectively to allele 1 and allele 2 of the biallelic marker. Table 3 EXAMPLE 4 VALIDATION OF THE POLYMORPHISMS THROUGH MICROSEQUENCING The biallelic markers identified in example 3 were further confirmed and their respective frequencies were determined through microsequencing. Microsequencing was carried out for each individual DNA sample described in Example 1. Amplification from genomic DNA of individuals was performed by PCR as described above for the detection of the biallelic markers with the same set of PCR primers (Table 1). The preferred primers used in microsequencing were about 19 nucleotides in length and hybridized just upsfream of the considered polymoφhic base. According to the invention, the primers used in microsequencing are detailed in Table 4. Table 4 Mis 1 and Mis 2 respectively refer to microsequencing primers which hybridized with the non-coding strand of the PG-3 gene or with the coding strand ofthe PG-3 gene. The microsequencing reaction was performed as follows : After purification of the amplification products, the microsequencing reaction mixture was prepared by adding, in a 20μl final volume: 10 pmol microsequencing oligonucleotide, 1 U Thermosequenase (Amersham E79000G), 1.25 μl Thermosequenase buffer (260 mM Tris HC1 pH 9.5, 65 mM MgCl 2 ), and the two appropriate fluorescent ddNTPs (Perkin Elmer, Dye Terminator Set 401095) complementary to the nucleotides at the polymoφhic site of each biallelic marker tested, following the manufacturer's recommendations. After 4 minutes at 94°C, 20 PCR cycles of 15 sec at 55°C, 5 sec at 72°C, and 10 sec at 94°C were carried out in a Tetrad PTC-225 thermocycler (MJ Research). The unincoφorated dye terminators were then removed by ethanol precipitation. Samples were finally resuspended in formamide-EDTA loading buffer and heated for 2 min at 95°C before being loaded on a polyacrylamide sequencing gel. The data were collected by an ABI PRISM 377 DNA sequencer and processed using the GENESCAN software (Perkin Elmer). Following gel analysis, data were automatically processed with software that allows the determination of the alleles of biallelic markers present in each amplified fragment. The software evaluates such factors as whether the intensities ofthe signals resulting from the above microsequencing procedures are weak, normal, or saturated, or whether the signals are ambiguous. In addition, the software identifies significant peaks (according to shape and height criteria). Among the significant peaks, peaks corresponding to the targeted site are identified based on their position. When two significant peaks are detected for the same position, each sample is categorized classification as homozygous or heterozygous type based on the height ratio. EXAMPLE 5 PREPARATION OF ANTIBODY COMPOSITIONS TO THE PG-3 PROTEIN Substantially pure protein or polypeptide is isolated from transfected or transformed cells containing an expression vector encoding the PG-3 protein or a portion thereof. The concentration of protein in the final preparation is adjusted, for example, by concentration on an Amicon filter device, to the level of a few micrograms/ml. Monoclonal or polyclonal antibody to the protein can then be prepared as follows: A. Monoclonal Antibody Production by Hybridoma Fusion Monoclonal antibody to epitopes in the PG-3 protein or a portion thereof can be prepared from murine hybridomas according to the classical method of Kohler, G. and Milstein, C, (1975) or derivative methods thereof. Also see Harlow, E., and D. Lane. 1988. Briefly, a mouse is repetitively inoculated with a few micrograms ofthe PG-3 protein or a portion thereof over a period of a few weeks. The mouse is then sacrificed, and the antibody producing cells ofthe spleen isolated. The spleen cells are fused by means of polyethylene glycol with mouse myeloma cells, and the excess unfused cells destroyed by growth ofthe system on selective media comprising aminopterin (HAT media). The successfully fused cells are diluted and aliquots ofthe dilution placed in wells of a microtiter plate where growth ofthe culture is continued. Antibody- producing clones are identified by detection of antibody in the supernatant fluid ofthe wells by immunoassay procedures, such as ELISA, as originally described by Engvall, (1980), and derivative methods thereof. Selected positive clones can be expanded and their monoclonal antibody product harvested for use. Detailed procedures for monoclonal antibody production are described in Davis, L. et al. (1986). B. Polyclonal Antibody Production by Immunization Polyclonal antiserum containing antibodies to heterogeneous epitopes in the PG-3 protein or a portion thereof can be prepared by immunizing suitable non-human animal with the PG-3 protein or a portion thereof, which can be unmodified or modified to enhance immunogenicity. A suitable non-human animal is preferably a non-human mammal is selected, usually a mouse, rat, rabbit, goat, or horse. Alternatively, a crude preparation which has been enriched for PG-3 concentration can be used to generate antibodies. Such proteins, fragments or preparations are introduced into the non-human mammal in the presence of an appropriate adjuvant (e.g. aluminum hydroxide, P BI, etc.) which is known in the art. In addition the protein, fragment or preparation can be pretreated with an agent which will increase antigenicity, such agents are known in the art and include, for example, methylated bovine serum albumin (mBSA), bovine serum albumin (BSA), Hepatitis B surface antigen, and keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH). Serum from the immunized animal is collected, treated and tested according to known procedures. If the serum contains polyclonal antibodies to undesired epitopes, the polyclonal antibodies can be purified by immunoaffinity chromatography. Effective polyclonal antibody production is affected by many factors related both to the antigen and the host species. Also, host animals vary in response to site of inoculations and dose, with both inadequate or excessive doses of antigen resulting in low titer antisera. Small doses (ng level) of antigen administered at multiple intradermal sites appears to be most reliable. Techniques for producing and processing polyclonal antisera are known in the art, see for example, Mayer and Walker (1987). An effective immunization protocol for rabbits can be found in Vaitukaitis, J. et al (1971). Booster injections can be given at regular intervals, and antiserum harvested when antibody titer thereof, as determined semi-quantitatively, for example, by double immunodiffusion in agar against known concenfrations ofthe antigen, begins to fall. See, for example, Ouchterlony, O. et al, (1973). Plateau concentration of antibody is usually in the range of 0.1 to 0.2 mg/ml of serum (about 12 μM). Affinity of the antisera for the antigen is determined by preparing competitive binding curves, as described, for example, by Fisher, D., (1980). Antibody preparations prepared according to either the monoclonal or the polyclonal protocol are useful in quantitative immunoassays which determine concentrations of antigen-bearing substances in biological samples; they are also used semi-quantitatively or qualitatively to identify the presence of antigen in a biological sample. The antibodies may also be used in therapeutic compositions for killing cells expressing the protein or reducing the levels ofthe protein in the body. While the preferred embodiment ofthe invention has been illustrated and described, it will be appreciated that various changes can be made therein by the one skilled in the art without departing from the spirit and scope ofthe invention. REFERENCES Abbondanzo SJ et al, 1993, Methods in Enzymology, Academic Press, New York, pp 803-823 Ajioka R.S. et al, Am. J. Hum. Genet., 60:1439-1447, 1997 Altschul et al, 1990, J. Mol. Biol. 215(3):403-410 Altschul et al, 1993, Nature Genetics 3:266-272 Altschul et al, 1997, Nuc. Acids Res. 25:3389-3402 Anton M. et al, 1995, J. Virol., 69 : 4600-4606 Araki K et α/. (1995) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 92(1): 160-4. Arnheim N & Shibata D, Curr. Op. Genetics & Development, 1997, 7:364-370 Aszόdi et al, Proteins: Structure, Function, and Genetics, Supplement 1:38-42 (1997) Ausubel et al. (1989)Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Green Publishing Associates and Wiley Interscience, N.Y. Baubonis W. (1993) Nucleic Acids Res. 21(9):2025-9. Beaucage et al, Tetrahedron Lett 1981, 22: 1859-1862 Bochar et al, (2000) Cell 102:257-265 Bradley A., 1987, Production and analysis of chimaeric mice. In: E.J. Robertson (Ed.), Teratocarcinomas and embryonic stem cells: A practical approach. IRL Press, Oxford, pp.l 13. Bram RJ et al, 1993, Mol. Cell Biol., 13 : 4760-4769 Brown EL, Belagaje R, Ryan MJ, Khorana HG, Methods Enzymol 1979;68:109-151 Brutlag et al. Comp. App. Biosci. 6:237-245, 1990 Bush et al, 1997, J. Chromatogr., 777 : 311-328. Chai H. et al (1993) Biotechnol Appl BiochemΛ8:259-213. Chee et al. (1996) Science. 274:610-614. Chen and Kwok Nucleic Acids Research 25:347-353 1997 Chen et al. (1981) Mol. Cell. Biol. 7:2745-2752. Chen et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 94/20 10756-10761,1997 Cho RJ et al, 1998, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 95(7) : 3752-3757. Chou J.Y., 1989, Mol. Endocrinol., 3: 1511-1514. Clark A.G. (1990) Mol. Biol. Evol 7: 111-122. Coles R, Caswell R, Rubinsztein DC, Hum Mol Genet 1998;7:791-800 Compton J. (1991) Nature. 350(6313):91-92. Davis L.G., M.D. Dibner, and J.F. Battey, Basic Methods in Molecular Biology, ed., Elsevier Press, NY, 1986 Dempster et al, (1911) J. R. Stat. Soc, 39B: 1-38. Dent DS & Latchman DS (1993) The DNA mobility shift assay. In: Transcription Factors: A Practical Approach (Latchman DS, ed.) ppl-26. Oxford: IRL Press Eckner R. et al. (199\) EMB0J. 10:3513-3522. Edwards et Leatherbarrow, Analytical Biochemistry, 246, 1-6 (1997) Ellis NA,1997, Curr.Op.Genet.Dev.7:.354-363 Emi M, et al, Cancer Res. 1992 Oct 1; 52(19): 5368-5372 Engvall, E., Meth. Enzymol. 70:419 (1980) Excoffier L. and Slatkin M. (1995) Mol. Biol. Evol, 12(5): 921-927. Fanger GR et al, 1997 Curr.Op.Genet.Dev.7:67-74 Feldman and Steg, 1996, Medecine/Sciences, synthese, 12:47-55 Felici F., 1991, J. Mol. Biol., Vol. 222:301-310 Fields and Song, 1989, Nature, 340 : 245-246 Fishel R & Wilson T. 1997, Curr.Op.Genet.Dev.7: 105-113; Fisher, D., Chap. 42 in: Manual of Clinical Immunology, 2d Ed. (Rose and Friedman, Eds.) Amer. Soc. For Microbiol., Washington, D.C. (1980) Flotte et α/. (1992) Am. J. Respir. Cell Mol Biol. 7:349-356. Fodor et α/. (1991) Science 251:767-777. Fraley et α/. (1979) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 76:3348-3352. Fried M, Crothers DM, Nucleic Acids Res 1981;9:6505-6525 Fromont-Racine M. et al, 1997, Nature Genetics, 16(3) : 277-282. Fuller S. A. et al. (1996) Immunology in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Ausubel et al.Eds, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., USA. Furth P.A. et al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA. 91:9302-9306. Garner MM, Revzin A, Nucleic Acids Res 1981;9:3047-3060 Geysen H. Mario et al 1984. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 81 :3998-4002 Ghosh and Bacchawat, 1991, Targeting of liposomes to hepatocytes, IN: Liver Diseases, Targeted diagnosis and therapy using specific rceptors and ligands. Wu et al. Eds., Marcel Dekeker, New York, pp. 87-104. Gonnet et al, 1992, Science 256: 1443-1445 Gopal (1985) ?/. Cell. Biol, 5: 1188-1190. Gossen M. et al (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA. 89:5547-5551. Gossen M. et al. (1995) Science. 268: 1766-1769. Graham et al. (1973) Virology 52:456-457. Green et al, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 55:569-597 (1986) Griffin et al Science 245:967-971 (1989) Grompe, M. (1993) Nature Genetics. 5: 111-117. Grompe, M. et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 86:5855-5892. Gronwald J, et al, Cancer Res. 1997 Feb 1; 57(3): 481-487 Gu H. et al (1993) Cell 73:1155-1164. Gu H. et al. ( 1994) Science 265 : 103- 106. Guatelli J C et al (1990) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA. 35:273-286. Haber D & Harlow E, 1997, Nature Genet. 16:320-322 Hacia JG, Brody LC, Chee MS, Fodor SP, Collins FS, Nat Genet 1996;14(4):441-447 HaffL. A. and Smirnov I. P. (1997) Genome Research, 7:378-388. Hames B.D. and Higgins S.J. (1985) Nucleic Acid Hybridization: A Practical Approach. Hames and Higgins Ed., IRL Press, Oxford. Harju L, Weber T, Alexandra va L, Lukin M, Ranki M, Jalanko A, Clin Chem 1993;39(1 lPt l):2282-2287 Harland et al (1985) J. Cell. Biol. 101:1094-1095. Harlow, E., and D. Lane. 1988. Antibodies A Laboratory Manual. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, pp. 53-242 Haφer JW et al, 1993, Cell, 75 : 805-816 Harris H et αt ~ .,1969,Narure 223:363-368 Hawley M.E. et al. (1994) Am. J. Phys. Anthropol 18:104. Henikoff and Henikoff, 1993, Proteins 17:49-61 Higgins et al, 1996, Methods Enzymol. 266:383-402 Hillier L. and Green P. Methods Appl, 1991, 1: 124-8. Hoess et al (1986) Nucleic Acids Res. 14:2287-2300. Huang L. et α/. (1996) Cancer Res 56(5):1137-1141. Hunter T, 1991 Cell 64:249 Huygen et al (1996) Nature Medicine. 2(8):893-898. Ichikawa T, et al, Prostate Suppl. 1996; 6: 31-35 Ishwad CS, et al, Int. J. Cancer. 1999 Jan 5; 80(1): 25-31 Izant JG, Weintraub H, Cell 1984 Apr;36(4): 1007-15 Julan et α/. (1992) J. Gen. Virol. 73:3251-3255. Kanegae Y. et al, Nucl Acids Res. 23:3816-3821 (1995). Karlin and Altschul, 1990, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:2267-2268 Khoury J. et al, Fundamentals of Genetic Epidemiology, Oxford University Press, NY, 1993 Kim U-J. et al. (1996) Genomics 34:213-218. Klein et al. (1981) Nature. 327:70-73. Kohler, G. and Milstein, C, Nature 256:495 (1975) Roller et al Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 86:8932-8935 (1989) Koller et al (1992) Annu. Rev. Immunol. 10:705-730. Kozal MJ, Shah N, Shen N, Yang R, Fucini R, Merigan TC, Richman DD, Morris D, Hubbell E, Chee M, Gingeras TR, Nat Med 1996;2(7):753-759 Landegren U. et al. (1998) Genome Research, 8:769-776. Lander and Schork, Science, 265, 2037-2048, 1994 Lange K. (1997) Mathematical and Statistical Methods for Genetic Analysis. Springer, New York. Lenhard T. et al (1996) Gene. 169:187-190. Linton M.F. et al. (1993) 7. Clin. Invest. 92:3029-3037. Liu Z. et al. (1994) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA. 91 : 4528-4262. Livak et al, Nature Genetics, 9:341-342, 1995 Livak KJ, Hainer JW, Hum Mutat 1994;3(4):379-385 Lockhart et al Nature Biotechnology 14: 1675-1680, 1996 Lucas A.H., 1994, In : Development and Clinical Uses of Haempophilus b Conjugate; Mansour S.L. et al. (1988) Nature. 336:348-352. Marshall R. . et al (1994) PCR Methods and Applications. 4:80-84. Matsuyama H, et al, Oncogene 1994 Oct; 9(10): 3071-3076 McCormick et al. (1994) Genet. Anal. Tech. Appl 11:158-164. McLaughlin B. A. et al. (1996) Am. J. Hum. Genet. 59:561-569. Morton N.E., Am.J. Hum.Genet., 7:277-318, 1955 Muzyczka et al. (1992) Curr. Topics in Micro, and Immunol. 158:97-129. Nada S. et al. (1993) Cell 73: 1125-1135. Nagai H, et al, Oncogene 1997 Jun 19; 14(24): 2927-2933 Nagy A. et α/., 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 90: 8424-8428. Narang SA, Hsiung HM, Brousseau R, Methods Enzymol 1979;68:90-98 Neda et α/. (1991) J. Biol. Chem. 266: 14143-14146. Newton et al (1989) Nucleic Acids Res. 17:2503-2516. Nickerson D.A. et al. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87:8923-8927. Nicolau C. et al, 1987, Methods Enzymol., 149:157-76. Nicolau et α/. (1982) Biochim. Biophys. Ada. 721:185-190. Nyren P, Pettersson B, Uhlen M, Anal Biochem 1993;208(1): 171-175 O'Reilly et al. (1992) Baculovirus Expression Vectors: A Laboratory Manual. W. H. Freeman and Co., New York. Ohno et α/. (1994) Science. 265:781-784. Oldenburg K.R. et al, 1992, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 89:5393-5397. Orita et α/. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.86: 2776-2770. Ott J., Analysis of Human Genetic Linkage, John Hopkins University Press, Baltimore, 1991 Ouchterlony, O. et al, Chap. 19 in: Handbook of Experimental Immunology D. Wier (ed) Blackwell (1973) Parmley and Smith, Gene, 1988, 73:305-318 Pastinen et al. , Genome Research 1997; 7:606-614 Pearson and Lipman, 1988, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85(8):2444-2448 Pease S. ans William R.S., 1990, Exp. Cell. Res., 190: 209-211. Perinchery G, et al, Int. J. Oncol. 1999 Mar; 14(3): 495-500 Perlin et α/. (1994) Am. J. Hum. Genet. 55:777-787. Peterson et al, 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 90 : 7593-7597. Pietu et al. Genome Research 6:492-503, 1996 Pineau P, et α/., Oncogene 1999 May 20; 18(20): 3127-3134 Potter et al. (1984) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 81(22):7161-7165. Ramunsen et al, 1997, Electrophoresis, 18 : 588-598. Reid L.H. et al. (1990) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87:4299-4303. Risch, N. and Merikangas, K. (Science, 273:1516-1517, 1996 Robertson E., 1987, Embryo-derived stem cell lines. In: E.J. Robertson Ed. Teratocarcinomas and embrionic stem cells: a practical approach. TRL Press, Oxford, pp. 71. Rossi et al, Pharmacol Ther. 50:245-254, (1991) Roth J.A. et al. (1996) Nature Medicine. 2(9):985-991. Roux et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 86:9079-9083. Ruano et α/. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87:6296-6300. Sakabe T, et al, Cancer Res. 1999 Feb 1; 59(3): 511-515 Sakakura C, et al, Genes Chromosomes Cancer 1999 Apr; 24(4): 299-305 Sambrook, J., Fritsch, E.F., and T. Maniatis. (1989) Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual. 2ed. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, New York. Samson M, et al. (1996) Nature, 382(6593):722-725. Samulski et al. (1989) J. Virol. 63:3822-3828. Sanchez-Pescador R. (1988) J. Clin. Microbiol. 26(10):1934-1938. Sarkar, G. and Sommer S.S. (1991) Biotechniques . Sauer B. et al (1988) Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85:5166-5170. Schaid D.J. et al, Genet. Epidemiol.,l3:423-450, 1996 Schedl A. et al, 1993a, Nature, 362: 258-261. Schedl et al, 1993b, Nucleic Acids Res., 21: 4783-4787. Schena et α/. Science 270:467-470, 1995 Schena et al, 1996, Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A,.93(20):10614-10619. Schneider et al(l991) Arlequin: A Software For Population Genetics Data Analysis. University of Geneva. Scholnick SB, et al, J. Natl. Cancer Inst. 1996 Nov 20; 88(22): 1676-1682 Schwartz and Dayhoff, eds., 1978, Matrices for Detecting Distance Relationships: Atlas of Protein Sequence and Structure, Washington: National Biomedical Research Foundation Sczakiel G. et al. (1995) Trends Microbiol. 3(6):213-217. Shay J.W. et al, 1991, Biochem. Biophys. Acta, 1072: 1-7. Sheffield, V.C. et al. (1991) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 49:699-706. Shizuya et α/. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 89:8794-8797. Shoemaker DD, et al, Nat Genet 1996;14(4):450-456 Smith (1957) Ann. Hum. Genet. 21 :254-276. Smith et al. (1983) Mol Cell Biol. 3:2156-2165. Sosnowski RG, et al, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 1997;94: 1119-1123 Sowdhamini et al, Protein Engineering 10:207, 215 (1997) Spielmann S. and Ewens W.J., Am. J. Hum. Genet., 62:450-458, 1998 Spielmann S. et al., Am. J. Hum. Genet., 52:506-516, 1993 Sternberg N.L. (1994) Mamm. Genome. 5:397-404. Stemberg N.L. (1992) Trends Genet. 8:1-16. Stryer, L., Biochemistry, 4th edition, 1995, W. H Freeman & Co., New York. Sunwoo JB, et al, Genes Chromosomes Cancer 1996 Jul; 16(3):164-169 Sunwoo JB, et al, Oncogene 1999 Apr 22; 18(16): 2651-2655 Syvanen AC, Clin Chim Acta 1994;226(2):225-236 Szabo A. et al. Curr Opin Struct Biol 5, 699-705 (1995) Tacson et α/. (1996) Nature Medicine. 2(8):888-892. Te Riele et α/. (1990) Nature. 348:649-651. Terwilliger J.D. and Ott J., Handbook of Human Genetic Linkage, John Hopkins University Press, London, 1994 Thomas K.R. et al. (1986) Cell. 44:419-428. Thomas K.R. et al (1987) Cell. 51 :503-512. Thompson et al, 1994, Nucleic Acids Res. 22(2):4673-4680 Tur-Kaspa et al. (1986) Mol. Cell Biol. 6:716-718. Tyagi et al (1998) Nature Biotechnology. 16:49-53. Urdea M.S. (1988) Nucleic Acids Research. 11 :4937-4957. Urdea M.S. et al(l99l) Nucleic Acids Symp. Ser. 24:197-200. Vaitukaitis, J. et al. J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. 33:988-991 (1971) Valadon P., et al, 1996, J. Mol. Biol., 261:11-22. Van der Lugt et al. (1991) Gene. 105:263-267. Vlasak R. et al. (1983) Eur. J. Biochem. 135:123-126. Wabiko et α/. (1986) Z Λ.5(4):305-314. Walker et al. (1996) Clin. Chem. 42:9-13. Wang et al, 1997, Chromatographia, 44 : 205-208. Washbum J, Woino K, and Macoska J, Proceedings of American Association for Cancer Research, March 1997; 38 Weir, B.S. (1996) Genetic data Analysis II: Methods for Discrete population genetic Data, Sinauer Assoc, Inc., Sunderland, MA, U.S.A. Weiss FU et al, 1997 Curr.Op.Genet.Dev.7:80-86 Westerink M.A.J., 1995, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 92:4021-4025 White, M.B. et al (1992) Genomics. 12:301-306. Wong et al. (1980) Gene. 10:87-94. Wood S.A. et al, 1993, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 90: 4582-4585. Wright K, et al, Oncogene 1998 Sep 3; 17(9): 1185-1188 Wu and Wu (1987) J. Biol. Chem. 262:4429-4432. Wu and Wu (1988) Biochemistry. 27:887-892. Wu et al. (1989) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 86:2757. Yagi T. et al (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87:9918-9922. Yaremko ML, et al, Genes Chromosomes Cancer 1994 May;10(l):l-6 Zhao et al, Am. J. Hum. Genet., 63:225-240, 1998 Zou Y. R. et al. (1994) Curr. Biol. 4:1099-1103. SEQUENCE LISTING FREE TEXT The following free text appears in the accompanying Sequence Listing : 5' regulatory region 3 ' regulatory region polymoφhic base or complement probe sequencing oligonucleotide primer insertion of exon

Claims: WHAT IS CLAIMED: 1. An isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 15 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1 : 1-97921, 98517- 5 103471, 103603-108222, 108390-109221, 109324-114409, 114538-115723, 115957-122102, 122225-126876, 127033-157212, 157808-240825. 2. An isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 15 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof. 0 3. An isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotide consisting essentially of a contiguous span of at least 15 nucleotides of anyone of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2 or the complement thereof, wherein said span includes a PG-3-related biallelic marker in said sequence. 5 4. A polynucleotide according to claim 3, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof. 5. A polynucleotide according to claim 3, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A5 and A8 to A80, and the complements thereof. 0 6. A polynucleotide according to claim 3, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A6 and A7, and the complements thereof. 7. A polynucleotide according to claim 3, wherein said contiguous span is 18 to 35 5 nucleotides in length and said biallelic marker is within 4 nucleotides ofthe center of said polynucleotide. 8. A polynucleotide according to claim 7, wherein said polynucleotide consists of said contiguous span and said contiguous span is 25 nucleotides in length and said biallelic marker is at 0 the center of said polynucleotide. 9. A polynucleotide according to claim 7, wherein said polynucleotide consists essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences: PI to P4 and P6 to P80, and the complementary sequences thereto. 5 10. A polynucleotide according to any one of claims 1, 2 or 3, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. 11. A polynucleotide according to claim 3, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3' end of said polynucleotide and said biallelic marker is present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. 5 12. An isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotide consisting essentially of a contiguous span of at least 15 nucleotides of anyone of SEQ ID No 1,2 or the complements thereof, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3' end of said polynucleotide, and wherein the 3' end of said polynucleotide is located within 20 nucleotides upstream of a PG-3- 10 related biallelic marker in said sequence. 13. A polynucleotide according to claim 12, wherein the 3' end of said polynucleotide is located one nucleotide upsfream of said PG-3-related biallelic marker in said sequence. 15 14. A polynucleotide according to claim 13, wherein said polynucleotide consists essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences: Dl to D4, D6 to D80, El to E4, and E6 to E80. 15. An isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotide consisting essentially of a 20 sequence selected from the following sequences: Bl to B52 and Cl to C52. 16. An isolated, purified, or recombinant polynucleotide which encodes a polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3. 25 17. A polynucleotide according to any one of claims 1-16 attached to a solid support. 18. An array of polynucleotides comprising at least one polynucleotide according to claim 17. 30 19. An array according to claim 18, wherein said array is addressable. 20. A polynucleotide according to any one of claims 1-16 further comprising a label. 21. A recombinant vector comprising a polynucleotide according to any one of claims 1- 35 16. 22. A host cell comprising a recombinant vector according to claim 21. 23. A non-human host animal or mammal comprising a recombinant vector according to claim 21. 24. A mammalian host cell comprising a PG-3 gene disrupted by homologous recombination with a knock out vector, comprising a polynucleotide according to any one of claims 1- 16. 25. A non-human host mammal comprising a PG-3 gene disrupted by homologous recombination with a knock out vector, comprising a polynucleotide according to any one of claims 1-16. 26. A method of genotyping comprising determining the identity of a nucleotide at a PG-3- related biallelic marker or the complement thereof in a biological sample. 27. A method according to claim 26, wherein said biological sample is derived from a single subject. 28. A method according to claim 27, wherein the identity of the nucleotides at said biallelic marker is determined for both copies of said biallelic marker present in said individual's genome. 29. A method according to claim 26, wherein said biological sample is derived from multiple subjects. 30. A method according to claim 26, further comprising amplifying a portion of said sequence comprising the biallelic marker prior to said determining step. 31. A method according to claim 30, wherein said amplifying is performed by PCR. 32. A method according to claim 26, wherein said determining is performed by a hybridization assay. 33. A method according to claim 26, wherein said determining is performed by a sequencing assay. 34. A method according to claim 26, wherein said determining is performed by a microsequencing assay. 35. A method according to claim 26, wherein said determining is performed by an enzyme- based mismatch detection assay. 36. A method of estimating the frequency of an allele of a PG-3-related biallelic marker in a population comprising: a) genotyping individuals from said population for said biallelic marker according to the method of claim 26; and b) determining the proportional representation of said biallelic marker in said population. 37. A method of detecting an association between a genotype and a trait, comprising the steps of: a) determining the frequency of at least one PG-3-related biallelic marker in trait positive population according to the method of claim 36; b) determining the frequency of at least one PG-3 -related biallelic marker in a control population according to the method of claim 36; and c) determining whether a statistically significant association exists between said genotype and said frait. 38. A method of estimating the frequency of a haplotype for a set of biallelic markers in a population, comprising: a) genotyping at least one PG-3 -related biallelic marker according to claim 27 for each individual in said population; b) genotyping a second biallelic marker by determining the identity ofthe nucleotides at said second biallelic marker for both copies of said second biallelic marker present in the genome of each individual in said population; and c) applying a haplotype determination method to the identities ofthe nucleotides determined in steps a) and b) to obtain an estimate of said frequency. 39. A method according to claim 38, wherein said haplotype determination method is selected from the group consisting of asymmetric PCR amplification, double PCR amplification of specific alleles, the Clark algorithm, or an expectation-maximization algorithm. 40. A method of detecting an association between a haplotype and a trait, comprising the steps of: a) estimating the frequency of at least one haplotype in a frait positive population according to the method of claim 38; b) estimating the frequency of said haplotype in a control population according to the method of claim 38; and c) determining whether a statistically significant association exists between said haplotype and said frait. 5 41. A method according to claim 37, wherein said genotyping steps a) and b) are performed on a single pooled biological sample derived from each of said populations. 42. A method according to claim 37, wherein said genotyping steps a) and b) performed 10 separately on biological samples derived from each individual in said populations. 43. A method according to either claim 37 or 40, wherein said trait is cancer susceptibility. 44. A method according to either claim 37 or 40, wherein said confrol population is a frait 15 negative population. 45. A method according to either claim 37 or 40, wherein said case control population is a random population. 20 46. Use of a polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 15 nucleotides of a sequence selected from the group consisting ofthe SEQ ID Nos 1, 2, amplicons 5-390, 5-391, 5- 392, 4-59, 4-58, 4-54, 4-51, 99-86, 4-88, 5-397, 5-398, 99-12738, 99-109, 99-12749, 4-21, 4-23, 99- 12753, 5-364, 99-12755, 4-87, 99-12757, 99-12758, 4-105, 4-45, 4-44, 4-86, 4-84, 99-78, 99- 12767, 4-80, 4-36, 4-35, 99-12771, 99-12774, 99-12776, 99-12781, 4-104, 99-12818, 99-24807, 99- 25 12827, 99-12831, 99-12832, 99-12836, 99-12844, 4-24, 4-27, 5-400, 99-12852, 4-37, 5-270, 99- 12860, and 5-402 or the complementary sequence thereto for determining the identity ofthe nucleotide at a PG-3 -related biallelic marker 30 47. Use according to claim 46 in a microsequencing assay, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3' end of said polynucleotide and wherein the 3' end of said polynucleotide is located 1 nucleotide upstream of said PG-3-related biallelic marker in said sequence. 35 48. Use according to claim 46 in a hybridization assay, wherein said contiguous span includes said PG-3-related biallelic marker. 49. Use according to claim 46 in a specific amplification assay, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3' end of said polynucleotide and said biallelic marker is present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. 50. Use according to claim 46 in a sequencing assay, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. 51. Use according to any one of claims 46-50, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic is a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A80. 52. An isolated, purified, or recombinant polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3. 53. An isolated or purified antibody composition capable of selectively binding to an epitope-containing fragment of a polypeptide according to claim 52. 54. A method according to any one of claims 26-45, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80 and the complements thereof. 55. A diagnostic kit comprising a polynucleotide according to any one of claims 3-15. 56. A computer readable medium having stored thereon a sequence selected from the group consisting of a nucleic acid code comprising one ofthe following: a) a contiguous span of at least 15 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1 : 1 -97921 , 98517- 103471, 103603-108222, 108390-109221, 109324-114409, 114538-115723, 115957-122102, 122225-126876, 127033-157212, 157808-240825; b) a contiguous span of at least 15 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof; and c) a nucleotide sequence complementary to any one ofthe preceding nucleotide sequences. 57. A computer readable medium having stored thereon a sequence consisting of a polypeptide code comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3. 58. A computer system comprising a processor and a data storage device wherein said data storage device is a computer readable medium according to claim 56 or 57. 59. A computer system according to claim 58, further comprising a sequence comparer and a data storage device having reference sequences stored thereon. 60. A computer system of Claim 59 wherein said sequence comparer comprises a computer 5 program which indicates polymoφhisms. 61. A computer system of Claim 58 further comprising an identifier which identifies features in said sequence. 10 62. A method for comparing a first sequence to a reference sequence, comprising the steps of: reading said first sequence and said reference sequence through use of a computer program which compares sequences; and determining differences between said first sequence and said reference sequence with said 15 computer program, wherein said first sequence is selected from the group consisting of a nucleic acid code comprising one ofthe following: a) a contiguous span of at least 15 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 , wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1 : 1-97921, 98517- 20 103471, 103603-108222, 108390-109221, 109324-114409, 114538-115723, 115957-122102, 122225-126876, 127033-157212, 157808-240825; b) a contiguous span of at least 15 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof; and c) a nucleotide sequence complementary to any one ofthe preceding nucleotide sequences; 25 and, d) a polypeptide code comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3. AMENDED CLAIMS [received by the International Bureau on 25 January 2001 (25.01.01); original claims 1,2 and 56 amended; remaining claims unchanged (2 pages)] 1. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 200 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 or the complements thereof, wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one ofthe following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1 : 1-97921 , 98517- 5 103471 , 103603-108222, 108390-109221, 109324-114409, 1 14538-115723, 115957-122102, 122225-126876, 127033-157212, 157808-240825. 2. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide comprising a contiguous span of at least 200 nucleotides of SEQ DO No 2 or the complements thereof. 0 3. An isolated, punfied, or recombinant polynucleotide consisting essentially of a contiguous span of at least 15 nucleotides of anyone of SEQ ID Nos 1 and 2 or the complement thereof, wherein said span includes a PG-3 -related biallelic marker in said sequence. 5 4. A polynucleotide according to claim 3, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80, and the complements thereof. 5. A polynucleotide according to claim 3, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A5 and A8 to A80, and the complements thereof 0 6 A polynucleotide according to claim 3, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of A6 and A7, and the complements thereof 7. A polynucleotide according to claim 3, wherein said contiguous span is 18 to 35 5 nucleotides in length and said biallelic marker is within 4 nucleotides of the center of said polynucleotide. 8. A polynucleotide according to claim 7, wherem said polynucleotide consists of said contiguous span and said contiguous span is 25 nucleotides in length and said biallelic marker is at 0 the center of said polynucleotide. 9. A polynucleotide according to claim 7, wherem said polynucleotide consists essentially of a sequence selected from the following sequences: PI to P4 and P6 to P80, and the complementary sequences thereto. 5 10 A polynucleotide according to any one of claims 1, 2 or 3, wherem the 3' end of said contiguous span is present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. 49. Use according to claim 46 in a specific amplification assay, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3' end of said polynucleotide and said biallelic marker is present at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. 50. Use according to claim 46 in a sequencing assay, wherein the 3' end of said contiguous span is located at the 3' end of said polynucleotide. 51. Use according to any one of claims 46-50, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic is a biallelic marker selected from the group consisting of Al to A80. 52. An isolated, purified, or recombinant polypeptide comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3. 53. An isolated or purified antibody composition capable of selectively binding to an epitope-containing fragment of a polypeptide according to claim 52. 54. A method according to any one of claims 26-45, wherein said PG-3-related biallelic marker is selected from the group consisting of Al to A80 and the complements thereof. 55. A diagnostic kit comprising a polynucleotide according to any one of claims 3-15. 56. A computer readable medium having stored thereon at least 2 nucleic acid code sequences comprising any one of the following: a) a contiguous span of at least 200 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 1 , wherein said contiguous span comprises at least one of the following nucleotide positions of SEQ ID No 1 : 1 -97921 , 98517- 103471, 103603-108222, 108390-109221, 109324-114409, 114538-115723, 115957-122102, 122225-126876, 127033-157212, 157808-240825; b) a contiguous span of at least 200 nucleotides of SEQ ID No 2 or the complements thereof; and c) a nucleotide sequence complementary to any one ofthe preceding nucleotide sequences. 57. A computer readable medium having stored thereon a sequence consisting of a polypeptide code comprising a contiguous span of at least 6 amino acids of SEQ ID No 3. 58. A computer system comprising a processor and a data storage device wherein said data storage device is a computer readable medium according to claim 56 or 57.

Inventors: BARRY CAROLINE, BLUMENFELD MARTA, CHUMAKOV ILYA, BARRY, CAROLINE, BLUMENFELD, MARTA, CHUMAKOV, ILYA
Applicants: BARRY CAROLINE, BLUMENFELD MARTA, CHUMAKOV ILYA, GENSET SA, BARRY, CAROLINE, BLUMENFELD, MARTA, CHUMAKOV, ILYA, GENSET
Application year: 2000
Main classification: C12N15
IPC codes: C07K14, C12N15, C12Q1